JP6716515B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) and a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, the result of a variable display game that is executed based on winning in a specific area of a game medium is pre-determined (pre-reading determination) before the execution of the variable display game, and it is possible to suggest the result. ) Is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-208006, A

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is not possible to provide the player with an appropriate expectation notification effect, and there is a concern that the interest of the expectations notification effect may be reduced.

The problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.

In a typical form of the gaming machine of the present invention, a starting information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of starting information that can be acquired when a winning of a game medium into a winning area within a gaming area is triggered; Starting memory display means that can be displayed on the display device as a starting memory display, lottery game executing means that can execute a lottery game based on the starting information, and whether the lottery game derives a specific result based on the starting information Predetermination means that can determine whether or not the start information is acquired, and expectation that can be notified stepwise by a plurality of notification modes whether or not the lottery game derives a specific result based on the start information Degree informing means, digestion memory display means capable of displaying start information for executing the lottery game as a digestion memory display in an area different from the start memory display of the display device, start of execution of the lottery game and result derivation A display mode setting means capable of displaying the display mode of the digestive memory display at the time of the notification mode, and the display mode of the startup memory display is started in a mode based on the startup information, and a predetermined mode is set. stepwise display mode in the start memory display change timing are capable change the notification manner, in the display mode when the result derivation of said lottery game to be displayed as the display mode of the previous SL digestion storage displays the notification manner When displayed, the stepwise change transition of the notification mode that can be changed stepwise until the notification mode is displayed as a display mode when deriving the result of the lottery game is triggered by the winning of the game medium and is started. Without determining when the information is acquired, when the starting information is acquired upon the winning of the game medium or when the execution of the lottery game is started, the final mode determining means displays the digestion memory as the display mode of the lottery game. Only the notification mode displayed at the time of deriving the result is determined, and the display mode of the digestion memory display is started by the display mode setting means in the display mode of the startup memory display immediately before the start of execution of the lottery game. There is a case where the display is started in a mode different from the display mode of the starting memory display immediately before the start of the execution of the lottery game by the display mode setting means, and in any case, the result of the lottery game is displayed. Every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of deriving, it can be changed stepwise until the notification mode determined by the final mode determination means is displayed, and the lottery game is displayed after the start memory display is displayed. The series of display modes by the starting memory display and the digestive memory display until the result of It changes step by step until the result of the lottery game is derived after the start memory display is displayed, and at the time of starting execution of the lottery game and at the time of deriving the result, in a display mode predetermined by the display mode setting means. When the display mode of the digestive memory display is not the notification mode determined by the final mode determining means, the predetermined condition is satisfied during the reach which is a process of deriving the result of the lottery game, and the digestive memory display is performed. The display mode of can be changed to the notification mode determined by the final mode determination means .

According to an aspect of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above problems and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 8, and was seen from the front. It is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 15 to a peripheral control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 18 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 17. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special design and special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a starting mouth winning a prize. It is a figure showing an example of a starting mouth winning time control data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. It is a flow chart which shows an example of memory pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to advance notice permission determination data, (A) is an example of advance notice permission determination data address table, (B) is an example of advance notice permission determination data. It is the figure which shows the table which relates to the special design reservation sphere number command, (A) is the special design reservation sphere number command address table, (B) is one example of the special design reservation sphere number designation command compilation table. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol big hit determination process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern selection judging processing. 30 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the variation pattern selection determination process of FIG. 29. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change type judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing a continuation of the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol/flag setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and a normal electric auditors product control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of passing a gate. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol pre-reading process. It is a figure which shows an example of a general-reading pre-reading determination prohibition period. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure of a main control program. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of received command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a decorative design variation start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decorative design change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of story reach setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of a production selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of a random number extraction range in order of a time series. It is a figure explaining the example of production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of production of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous variation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of quasi-continuous fluctuation control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of a pseudo continuous variation. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of quasi-continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of quasi-continuous fluctuation. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special figure pre-reading production control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetch effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous prefetch effect lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the consecutive pre-reading production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous prefetch effect mode selection table for selecting the mode (specific effect) of continuous prefetch effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of a continuous prefetching effect. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the procedure of general picture pre-reading production processing. It is the figure which shows one example of general picture pre-reading production. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. It is an example of a table showing an example. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. It is an example of a table showing an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory read-ahead process of a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flow chart in which the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach depending on the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an executability table. (A) is an example of a table showing the conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a received command analysis process of modification 1. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a read-ahead prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the first modification. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a received command analysis process of modification 2. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of an input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of unknown count processing in the received command analysis processing of modification 2. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the big hit opening display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the production transition in a probability change short time state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production mode shift processing performed by peripheral control MPU450a. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pre-reading production control processing which includes the change control of special figure pre-reading production. It is a table for selecting a scenario of special figure prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect). It is a table for selecting a scenario of special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect). It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pre-reading production control processing which includes the special figure pre-reading production switching control and which can execute the hold pre-reading production and the background pre-reading production in parallel. It is a figure showing an example of special figure pre-reading production (background pre-reading production). It is the figure which shows the production example which changes the special figure pre-reading production which is being executed (background pre-reading production) to the special figure pre-reading production based on the newly generated starting memory. It is the figure which shows the production example where the background pre-reading production and the background pre-reading production are executed in parallel and the background pre-reading production being executed is switched to the background pre-reading production based on the newly generated starting memory. It is a figure explaining the specification of special drawing prefetching effect control of a modification. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special figure pre-reading production control processing of modification. It is an example of the final mode determination table of the modification. It is an example of the scenario selection table of a modification. It is an example of the reservation scenario pattern table of a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production setting processing of a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reservation starting storage continuous prefetching effect setting processing of a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting process at the time of the start of digestion storage of a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the digest display scenario setting process of a modification. (A) An example of a digest display lottery table of a modified example, and (B) An example of a time chart explaining the timing of the digest display lottery. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the decorative design variation processing of a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the digestion start memory continuous prefetch effect setting process of a modification. It is a figure explaining the outline of specific expectation production appearance control of a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production table setting processing. (A) is an enlarged view of the side winning opening member portion of the game board of the modified example, (B) is an enlarged view of the side winning opening member portion of the embodiment (FIG. 8) described above. (A) front view of a side winning opening member of a modification, (B) rear view, (C) rear perspective view focusing on the general winning opening 2201a side, (D) rear winning perspective focusing on the general winning opening 2201b side. is there. It is the (A) front view of the discharge flow path of a modification, the (B) perspective view, and the (C) exploded perspective view. It is (A) perspective view of a discharge flow path cover, (B) front view, (C) rear view. It is (A) front view of the discharge flow path part of a discharge flow path main body, and (B) perspective view.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. Yes, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box whose front side is openly supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and in which a game ball as a game medium is hit, and the front surfaces of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are on the player side. And a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Are provided.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the up-down direction in a front view, and the horizontal widths of the left-right direction are substantially the same. The main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2, and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven is exposed through a substantially circular game window 101, and the game area 1100 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. As described above, the two upper plates 301 and the lower plate 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

Although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590 and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the area 1100.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. Four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and by connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 with the connecting member 14, a vertically long rectangular shape ( It is assembled in a square shape. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. In addition, upper support fittings 20 described later are attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal mold members (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall. The pachinko game machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be improved.

The outer frame 2 is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support metal 20. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcement metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement metal fitting 22. 23 is provided. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After the body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the body support frame 3 can be easily mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the body frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c. It is designed so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be vertically spaced apart by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. The closing plates 24, 25 are hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 1) of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 that is provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, respectively. A hitting ball launching device 650 which is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a top plate 301 of the plate unit 300 which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize sphere unit 700 for paying out a sphere, and a game sphere mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 from the prize sphere unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. And a ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for shutting off the flow.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed to have a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction in a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and a main body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear side. The protruding door frame protrusion 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bending protrusion 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 are provided. And an engaging groove 603 into which the open side outward bending protrusion 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By the peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and the game board stopper of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 that are arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4. And are equipped with. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. There is. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. .. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, in the main body frame base 600, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the hitting ball launching device is provided on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a far space 626 that spreads leftward and downward is formed on the left side in front view of the upper end of the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650. It is like this. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has an opening penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings are formed on the upper side of the opening and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating therethrough. The opening of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are arranged to face the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 for operating the door frame 5 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like this. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached, When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, respectively, using predetermined screws to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to an upper metal fitting mounting portion of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped front extension that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 provided so as to project upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension part 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in a front view (see FIG. 7). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the vertical direction and a front extension portion 632 are hung downward from the left end of the front view portion 632 to restrict the pivotal end of the door frame 5 to the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and for supporting the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Of the main body frame shaft support metal fittings 644. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mount portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mount portion that extends forward from the lower end of the mount portion. A plate-shaped front extension 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 642b in the up-down direction, and A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the extending portion 642b when viewed from the front, and restricts the turning end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support 642, the mounting portion, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 of the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to a lower metal fitting mounting portion of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion to the front. The front extending portion 644b is provided, and a body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction is provided near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. In the body frame shaft support 644, the mounting portion and the front extending portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and The front extending portion 642b and the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are attached to a lower metal fitting attaching portion of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxial with each other. The main body frame support hole of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the lower support metal fitting 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension part 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21 (see FIG. 4) so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It is like this.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. 5 of the lower shaft support 158 (see FIG. 7) is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame support metal fitting 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. The door frame 5 can be rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the shaft support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. By sliding the shaft pin 155 downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 vertically overlap with each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is a metal plate launching base 652 that is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the lower rear face of the launching base 652 so that the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward. Firing solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be rotatable integrally, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a predetermined trajectory on the movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 658 at the tip of the batting hammer 656 passes between the launch rail 660 that extends diagonally to the upper left in the front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and the launch rail 660 above the proximal end of the launch rail 660. A ball stop piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap through which a game ball cannot pass at the same time, and a game held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from the hitting position where the ball can be hit to the firing rail 660 side.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the rotary drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. .. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc shape from the fixed portion 656a so that the tip is located at the axis of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a rod portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip end in the direction of the normal line, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a interposed between the rod portion 656b and the stopper 664 and can come into contact with the stopper portion 656c. Equipped with. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

In the state where the hitting ball launch device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. It is designed to be located below 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 that spreads downward is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located at the bottom of the foul space 626, and the game is performed. The game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 drops in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. At the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the gaming balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and then the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued based on a predetermined payout instruction. To pay out. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko Island facility side 720, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and the game balls which are aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize sphere device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game spheres paid out by the prize sphere device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game balls are full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

The prize ball unit 700 also includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725, a weight is held inside, and the other end thereof hangs down by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape of a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that

Further, the tank rail unit 730 includes an alignment gear 732 that is rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front. A ball pressing plate 734 closing the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stopper 735 capable of advancing and retracting in the tank rail 731 and stopping rolling of the game ball in the tank rail 731 to the discharge port side. , Are provided. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game sphere divided into two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize Ball Device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 is connected to the lower end of the supply passage and a supply passage that opens to the upper end and is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game sphere and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage communicating with the lower end (open side) of the distribution space when viewed from the rear (open side) and opening in the left side when viewed from the rear, and the right side of the distribution space viewed from the rear (Spindle support side), a ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 includes a first gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate, a second gear meshing with the first gear, and a second gear meshing with the second gear. The third gear, the payout rotating body that is integrally rotated together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the payout rotating body are integrally rotatably fixed on the opposite side with the third gear interposed therebetween in the circumferential direction. A rotation detection board having a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits formed at intervals, and a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage. Holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed on a rotation detection plate that rotates integrally with a payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. A rotation angle switch board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting switch 751, and a prize ball in-case board 754 that relays connections between the rotation angle switch 752 and a payout control board to be described later are provided.

The payout rotating body is provided with three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotating body rotates, the game ball supplied from the supply passage is one. The balls are housed in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball passage passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting plate that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detecting plate and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation angle switch 752 detects the detection slits provided at the respective positions, so that the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

In the prize ball device 740, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body in the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one, and then passed to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are to be dispensed to the ball removing passage, and the game balls dispensed to the ball removing passage are removed from the ball. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and is opened upward at approximately the center of the rear end upper part in the left-right direction. A prize ball receiving port that receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball passage, a branch space that is placed below the prize ball receiving port and spreads in the left and right direction, and a game from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side A normal passage that guides the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball that has flowed through the normal passage to the front and opens at the front end right end of the front end, and separates to the rear view right side from directly below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball toward the front side from the open position, and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball flowing through the full passage to the front and opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view. ing.

In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball withdrawal opening and a ball withdrawal opening that opens upward at the left end in front view of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage of the prize ball device 740. At a position behind the normal passage outlet 774 and the full-ball outlet 776 at the left end when viewed from the front end by releasing the passage ball that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side and the game ball flowing through the passage passage to the front. And a ball outlet that is open.

In the full tank branching unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second sphere inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) is designed to communicate with each other, and the game sphere discharged from the normal sphere outlet 774 passes through the first sphere inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to the plate. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and discharged from the full tank ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the right upper end of the body frame base ball passage of the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the body frame of the body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the base ball passage.

When the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is moved upward. The game ball that cannot be discharged to the side of the dish 301 stays in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 also fills the upstream normal path. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball inlet cannot enter the normal passage, and starts moving laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters the tank passage and is supplied from the full tank outlet to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. Is becoming

[3-5. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the payout control board box 860 in front view. And a main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the substrate unit base 810.

The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 which is opened upward and which receives the game balls discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 on the front surface on the left side of the left and right center in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 and a front side of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) are opened forward and upward. The power supply board box holder 840 is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side, and a box housing portion capable of housing the front end of the power supply board box 850 is provided.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 flows through a main body frame base ball-removing passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810. The gaming ball and the gaming ball discharged from the out ball discharging section of the game board 4 and received by the discharging ball receiving section 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. Is becoming

The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close a front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. A power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

The payout control board box 860 includes a horizontally long and thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, a thin box-shaped cover 862 which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened, and the box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface of the cover and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating/cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error canceling part) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, it is operated to cancel the error, and there is a function to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on (the period when the function as the RAM clear is performed has passed. Later), the function of releasing the error is provided. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 871 and having peripheral panel relay terminals 872 fixed rearward, and a board base. Board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed rearward, peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 facing the rear side And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine on which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral control board 4140 and the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

Note that the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 has Only the connection terminal is exposed to the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. It is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full-tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Regarding the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362, the lending remaining display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be given later.

Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operations of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Is. The decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative units provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided on the operation unit 400. Various switches for detecting the operation of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), and a door. A right side decoration unit 200 that is attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side that faces the right side decoration unit 200 and is attached to the left outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base unit 100 at the lower part of the game window 101, the operation unit 400 mounted at the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, and at the right side of the plate unit 300. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the handle device 500 that penetrates through the plate unit 300 and is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and the door frame base unit 100 is sandwiched. A foul cover unit 540 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a door frame. A glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101 is provided.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 that has a game window 101 that is formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and has a vertically elongated substantially oval shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. An upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. The speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in front view, are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1)), and a firing cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is arranged on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. The handle relay terminal plate which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and relays the connection between the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the main control board 4100 provided in the game board 4 described later. 192 (see FIG. 1), a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a firing cover 191 and a handle relay terminal plate 192 that sandwich the center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 (see FIG. 1) which is arranged on the opposite side (right side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (shaft support side) in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body; The frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the amplifier board 194 is provided.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. In addition, an amplifier circuit for amplifying the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputting it to each speaker 130 is provided. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. And a switch, a handle relay terminal plate 192, a ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like, and wiring that electrically connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, and the like, in a rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being bundled together in a position on the right side (shaft support side), they are extended to the rear and connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and is formed in such a manner that the game window 101 having a vertically elongated inner shape and a generally elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been done. This game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. Further, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular notch portion is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) so that the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. The speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, which is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the front right side (open side) which is disposed in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. The handle mounting portion for mounting the handle bracket, which is inclined so as to retreat, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. At this point, a lock hole 116 is formed that is formed in a tubular shape that extends shortly toward the front and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and the widths of the left and right side sides of the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a shaft support attached along the rear side of the side wall of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the rear side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

An upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface thereof on an upper surface thereof and a lower shaft supporting portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 provided on a lower surface thereof are provided at upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152. It is equipped as one. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion is obtained. The engagement between 1041 and the hook cover 165 is released, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Plate unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and also shoots the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via a ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left direction toward the center in a front view, and linearly forward from the center toward the right direction. It is formed to project. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed in the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. .. The upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when this portion is pressed downward by a player, for example, the portion is bent downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 with the hand, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is detached from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. (Not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower plate ball removing holes 324b in accordance with the operation of The ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) which can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (which can be pressed by the player The operation unit) is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted or the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball to the player , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch included in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a pressing detection switch included in the operation unit 400.

Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation portion 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating it in reverse.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed rearward, and a lending balance display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency display 365c can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display unit 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining count display 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the count display plate 365, and the count display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. .. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash that has been lent and the prepaid card can be returned ing. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. It is possible to pull out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removing button 341 of the removing mechanism 340.

In the ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball frame opening of the door frame base body 110, and the intrusion port penetrates in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet that opens to the lower side of the entrance and has an open rear, and a box-shaped that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-back direction. Then, the rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball entering from the entrance port of the front cover to the hitting ball launching device 650, and pivoting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member having a partition part that is pivotally supported as possible and that partitions between the entry port and the ball removing port on the rear side of the front cover, and one game ball on the partition part of the ball removing member for hitting the rear cover. A ball feeding member rotatably supported around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front cover and the rear cover is provided to the supply port 582a, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member. There is.

When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member receives one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member receives. The game ball is adapted to be sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110, has a cylindrical shape, and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and that is rotatable relative to the handle base. It is arranged on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, which is fixed to the front of the rotary handle main body which is arranged on the front side, and the front of the rotary handle main body which is fixed to the front of the rotary handle main body and is rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 which is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotating handle body and the rear of the rotating handle body in cooperation with the handle base.

Further, the handle device 500 is fitted and fixed to a shaft member having a non-circular bearing portion at a rear end, which is fixed by being attached so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body. And a potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft that is rotatable and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and a potentiometer 512 that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a touch stop switch 516 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member. , A single-shot button that is rotatably supported by the switch support member and that operates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body front portion that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member. And a handle return spring for urging the handle so as to return to a counterclockwise rotation end). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, the rotary handle body is rotated from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position that is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view). To do.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member. .. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball striking device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, and the rotation handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launching intensity corresponding to the rotation angles of the front body 506 and the rotation handle body, that is, the rotation positions of the front rotation handle body 506 and the rotation handle body. There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and has a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball that has been shot by the ball striking device 650. The game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base whose front side is opened and has a plurality of flow paths for gaming balls inside, and a front cover which closes the front end of the cover base.

The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball entrance 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in a rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first ball entrance 542a which communicates with the first ball entrance and spreads to the right as viewed from the front toward the front end of the cover base 542. Inside the cover base that communicates with the first ball passage and the second ball passage 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a. , A second sphere entrance 542c that extends downward and inclines so as to decrease toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In addition, the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, a predetermined amount of game balls An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is a foul ball inlet 542e which is disposed in the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and which opens upward, and a foul capable of guiding the game ball to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the second ball passage in communication with the foul ball inlet 542e. And a ball passage. Further, the cover base includes an opening/closing operation piece for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece abuts on a spherical contact portion of the opening/closing crank in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank to open the opening/closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, and is in communication with the first ball passage of the cover base, and penetrates in the front-back direction. An outlet and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 passes the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage to the dish unit 300. It is possible to supply to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage to the second ball outlet. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300.

Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball striking device is provided. If the game ball shot by 650 becomes a foul ball without reaching the game area 1100 and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received in the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be pivotable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space. The member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a direction in which the full member switch 550 does not detect the swing member are provided. The swing member has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base, and an upper end that is rotatable leftward in front view. To form. Further, the swinging member is biased by the spring to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swing member has a detection piece protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and the detection piece is detected by the full-tank switch 550. In other words, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as disassembled and seen from the front. As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a player operates the handle device 500 so that a game ball as a game medium is hit in a game area 1100. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines the outer periphery and a position where the front component member 1110 can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member when viewed from the front. And a plurality of openings 1158 that are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and that penetrate the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It has a plate-shaped game panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

Further, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that can be visually recognized from the player side according to a game state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the area 1100 is partitioned. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer guide surface 1115, which is arranged at the lowermost end and becomes lower toward the rear, and closes the outer rail 1111. Only the closed position extending upward and the open position in which the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated and returned to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring.

When the gaming board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, and the launch rail 660 (see FIG. (See) is located on the extension line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Also, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball-striking launcher 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by contacting the game ball with this stopper 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. Even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return to between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000 and the winning holes 2103, 2104 and 2201 and the like, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, An outer outlet guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 is guided to the outer outlet 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the outer outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 And a far space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1) (see FIG. 1) and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the dish unit 300 is received. It is adapted to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball, and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component member 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction with a space therebetween in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is open downward, and has an upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the lower end when viewed from the front. A ball passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch that extends upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side surface crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to provide a game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5). The front end of the game board 4 inserted in) can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board engaging portion of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board member. The front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the stop portion.

Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110, in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the body frame 3, a game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the body frame 3 (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 5) is rotated clockwise in a front view, a fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the game board fixing tool 690 causes the game board 4 to play. The lower end of the is restricted from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage cutout 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is provided with a game board holding opening 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the lower right side of the front component 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The table unit 2000 is an attacker unit 2100 that is disposed above the outlet 1151 in the lower center of the left and right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, the outer circumference of the game area 1100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the front side of the game panel 1150 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150; There is.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and then attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion projecting to the front side of the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. As a result, the table unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the movement of the game ball is prevented. It is possible to add a change. In addition, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged approximately at the center in the left-right direction. A starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening 2102 arranged below the upper starting opening 2101, and a rectangular shape extending below the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 in the left-right direction. It has a special winning opening 2103 and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 and slightly upward. The game balls received in the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be always received (winning). On the other hand, the lower starting opening 2102 arranged below the upper starting opening 2101 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be opened by the starting opening solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) between the lower starting opening 2101 and the upper starting opening 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand up substantially vertically, the upper starting opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces can move. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102. In other words, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning port (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of passage of a game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

The special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened/closed by an opening/closing member 2107 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2107 has a lower side pivotally supported so that it can close the special winning opening 2103 in a substantially vertical state to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is turned to, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be easily received. This opening/closing member 2107 is in a state in which the special winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal game state, and a special lottery is performed when a game ball is received (start winning) in the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. According to the result of the lottery (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), it can be opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99), and the variable winning port (variable winning device). Is composed of.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and the game balls can be always received (winning).

Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. The upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting the game ball received in the upper starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-2-2. Side winning mouth member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. Above, the two are fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and are arranged so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in front view of the attacker unit 2100. A general winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are open upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position such that the left end portion of the side winning opening member 2200 is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with two general winning openings 2201 sandwiched between them and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that decreases toward the (2103 side), and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be brought closer to the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

It should be noted that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf portion 2202, and even if the game balls are moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 is also provided with a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to be lower toward the center of the game area 1100.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. It is said that they can be illuminated.

[5-2-3. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted into the game panel 1150 from the front side with respect to an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view has an arc shape so as to form a gap with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. While being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs so as to form a region of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game region 1100.

This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 inclined downward to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. It has a game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and flows down to the upper shelf portion 2301 through the left side of the center role object 2300, and to the right of the upper shelf portion 2301. The game ball flowing down (invading) to the center accessory 2300 passes rightward and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center role object 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the hitting strength of the game ball is increased. It is possible to adjust the length appropriately, and to maintain a sense of tension so that the game can be prevented from becoming a boring game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 to be a center character object. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in 2300 is mainly provided.

Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 has a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied and a game ball from the first stage arranged in front of the first stage. It is provided with a second stage which is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lowered. Further, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage. It is designed to be discharged from the outlet 2314 into the game area 1100. This chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball emitted from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) in the upper start opening 2101 with a high probability. ing.

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the ornamental body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. Has become.

In addition, the center accessory 2300 is transparent on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302, and to the left so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112. The arch part 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center role object 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. ..

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. This gate portion 2350 is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and detects a gate entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter and a game ball entering the gate entrance. It is provided with a gate switch 2352 and a gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In this embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if it were submerged.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light-emissions formed in a circular or crossed shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The decorative hole is provided with a luminous decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged on the rear side of the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 are disposed on the rear side. And a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 of the panel lens member 2500 are protruded forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emission decoration hole to be inserted. It has a section. In a state in which the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially match the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flowing down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It does not affect the sphere as much as possible.

The panel lens member 2500 can cause the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light as appropriate, so that the region into which the game ball flows down can be illuminated by using an opaque game panel 1150 such as plywood. The decoration of the game panel 1150 that has never been seen can be shown to the player, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made conspicuous to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back box 3001 for supporting the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. An upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The body unit 3500 is mainly provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged near the lower left front end of the back box 3001 at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. The side lamp decoration substrate 3014, the game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and the game received in the left general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and that guides the game ball that is received by the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side downward. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 has a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 disposed in a lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and housing the lamp drive board 4170, and a lower side of the lamp drive board box 3423. And a horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 accommodating the motor drive board 4180, and a lamp drive board box 3423 and a motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and arranged on the left side in rear view. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally elongated rectangular upper resistance substrate arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to detachably hold the liquid crystal display device 1900. , Are further provided.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in association with each other according to the game state, and the movement allows the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of opportunities, etc., and entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed in the approximate center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through the opening. Further, the back box 3001 has mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, etc. at appropriate positions.

Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 has one fixing piece 1902 projecting outward from both right and left sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (right side in rear view) inserted and locked to the right side of the opening in rear view. The liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear side, and the lock member supports the other fixing piece 1902 (the left side when viewed from the rear side) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Induction member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow passages downward. The general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game ball received in the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right side. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the inside of the back box 3001 above the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper unit 3100 includes a rotary decoration unit 3200 having a circular shape in a front view, which is disposed on the front surface at a substantially center in the left-right direction, and a lifting mechanism which is arranged on the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 3200 and moves the rotary decoration unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged at the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

The rotating decorative body unit 3200 can be vertically moved by the elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In this rotary ornament unit 3200, a shuriken-shaped rotary ornament arranged on the front surface is rotated, and when the rotary ornament unit 3200 is rotated, the rotation radius of the rotary ornament is expanded by the centrifugal force. It is like this.

Further, since the rotary ornament unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary ornament increases and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and at the same time, attract the player's attention. It is possible to make it easy to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with being greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

The swinging ornament unit 3300 includes swinging ornaments arranged on the left and right sides of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotating ornamental unit 3200 located in the raised position. The body can be rocked to the left and right all at once.

The movable ceiling unit 3350 includes plate-shaped ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling ornament is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, and the rear end side of the ceiling ornament is rotated in a descending direction according to the gaming state. Is becoming

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body that is a model of a ninja, and the character body can move in the left-right direction from the right end position to a position closer to the center side depending on the game state. You can do it. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured such that the head can reciprocate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the right arm can reciprocate about an axis extending in the up-down direction. You can do it. With this, by rotating the head back and forth, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is nodding. In addition, by horizontally reciprocating the right arm, it is possible to make the character act as if throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear ornament unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality of up-and-down directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit on the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to the pachinko game machine.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 has a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. 1183 and upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101, which consists of two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state display 1183, and Upper special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and is selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 Display device 1185 and one 7 for displaying the second special symbol result which is arranged diagonally above the upper special symbol display device 1185 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. Lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of segment LEDs and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102 The special symbol memory display 1187 is provided.

In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, in order to display the number of reservations regarding the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls, which are arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display device 1186. Normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs, and for displaying the normal lottery result selected by the game ball placed below the normal symbol storage display by passing through the gate portion 2350 as a normal symbol The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", the special winning opening 2103 is opened and closed. And a round display 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

The gaming status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and various gaming statuses depending on the combination of the emitted light color and lighting/flashing ( For example, a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation short time state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

The upper special symbol storage display 1184, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the upper special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is accepted in the upper starting port 2101, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored (memorized) first special symbols stored is displayed. This upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a made of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b, depending on the lighting/flashing pattern of the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b. , The number of holdings can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. However, when the number of reservations is 3, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is 4, both upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b come to blink. There is. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The lower special symbol storage display 1187, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b, depending on the lighting/flashing pattern of the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. , The number of holdings can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, both lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. However, when the number of reservations is 3, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is 4, both lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b come to blink together. There is. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that have been selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the 7-segment LED is stopped for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and then stopped, and the emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED is used to play the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The person can recognize it (variable display game).

Ordinary symbol display 1189 is a red/green/orange color and a full-color LED whose emission color can be changed. By combining the emission color to be emitted and lighting/blinking, the gate portion 2350 is played. It is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn by passing a ball. The normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

The normal symbol storage display 1188, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) normal symbol The number of reservations (the number of memories) is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols. In this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbols is held (stored) up to four.

The round indicator 1190 is equipped with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b each made of a predetermined LED, and by turning on each lamp, it is possible to display the number of rounds in the "big hit" game. It is like this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. There is. Game state display 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol memory display 1188, normal symbol display 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection of the function display unit 1180.

In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodying the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. The position of the function display unit 1180 can be recognized by a clerk or the like in the hall without any confusion.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. Reference numeral 14 is a block diagram of a liquid crystal and a sound controller with a sound source built-in VDP and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 11, the control structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the game operation is performed. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for control, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or an instantaneous voltage of a predetermined voltage. It mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors a sign of a stop.

The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile storage means. This non-volatile storage means stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. .. This once-added ID code is stored in the non-volatile storage means and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile storage means.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function It consists of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 8, the upper start opening switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102, and the general winning opening 2104. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 that detects the game ball that has entered and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and a large winning opening 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraud using a magnet is a panel relay attached to the game board 4. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca on the basis of the detection signals from these respective switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting opening solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the panel relay terminal board 4161, and the function display board 1191, the upper special symbol display device 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol memory display 1184, lower special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display 1188, game state display 1183, and round display 1190 It outputs a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. As the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Gaming balls are also frequently detected. Therefore, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the game ball is frequently detected by the count switch 2110. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020. For this reason, the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function as serial data, so that the payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payment main ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca to the payout control board 4110.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands related to the control of game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

Now, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 4100ah. Circuit is connected via. The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to the method of transmitting as serial data, and may be the method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the command is stored in the ring buffer or the condition that the command is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It has a BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and a plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. And a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. And a volume adjusting volume 4140a for adjusting the volume of music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob portion.

[7-2-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. From a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and light emission of various LEDs). Peripheral control RAM 4150c storing information for managing schedule data etc. defining aspects, and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing history of jackpot gaming state and special Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing various production flags, and a peripheral control external watch dock timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. WDT4150e").

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from an unillustrated large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided in the power supply board 851. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer hold and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I/O port via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. 5. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of No. 5 is output from the peripheral control output from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405, which are provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral control various serial I. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak are read/written via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b through the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. DMA0 is a dedicated controller for independently performing data transfer between the I/O port 4150ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 4150ae and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices for independent data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. Further, while reading/writing to/from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and Reading/writing is performed on the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak through the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and various peripheral control serial I/O incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h, while various peripheral control various types are performed. For peripheral I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between the two.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I/O ports, motor drive board serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port, a main control substrate serial I/O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a, or an upper decoration of the door frame 5. It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6. Music and sound effects are made to flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. ..

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player. ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. .. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, it is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is committing a fraudulent activity. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect. There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and also to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source, the track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when an LED type backlight is mounted on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. , The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described below, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% intervals in 5% increments, and the current brightness adjustment information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set, is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. When December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side liquid crystal display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1900 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that stores exclusively the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 4150cf that stores only various information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And instructing the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ) Is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (various information that is updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, is input. Bank0 (1fr), which stores 1fr) as a backup target, and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0(1fr) and Bank0(1ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is referred to as “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU4150a. Since the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the device can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1ms)” means that the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” are respectively added (the same meaning is also used for effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later).

In Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is set. A door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a reception command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various kinds of information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, or in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. Has been. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Of the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction), operation of the push operation unit 405, and the like (for example, the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). This is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is set to the game board side emission data SL-DAT in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control section steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is located in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage region 4150cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing the copied copy of the production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac controls the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb manages two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which is one pair in total. The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each frame (1frame) in the peripheral control unit. Contents that are copied at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the regular processing is executed, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). It is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are zero-cleared. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.) While it can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 4150da is effect information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state and a special effect flag). Information (for example, information) is exclusively stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used in the same meaning for effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area 4150db. 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound controller]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the music and sound effects that flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control has a built-in sound source (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”) for performing sound control of music and sound effects. Display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source that controls drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to the various character data of the screen to be displayed, and the serialized music and sound effects toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as audio data. And an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting the data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame seen from the player. Body frame backside image data used to display the body frame backside image where the positions of the respective parts on the backside of 3 are visible, service mode screen image data used to display the service mode screen, and break timer setting used to display the break timer setting screen The screen image data and the screen image data during break used for displaying the screen during break are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae when a V blank signal described later is input. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, a V blank signal is input, and the first sound is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the beginning is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. 14, a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to a game board. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a becomes Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Drawing data of a frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side Image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps for a second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

Note that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer system" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. ..

It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

Further, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of output volumes of the built-in sound source of the VDP4160a with a sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, a master volume value that is a volume flowing from a speaker housed in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker volume 820 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that is output from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjusting volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually stored in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Is based on the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is totally independent of the volume adjustment, and the synthesized volume of the notification sound is actually the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from 130, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is caused. To briefly explain the control of sending the alarm sound to notify the clerk of the hall of illegal activities, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is incorporated. Sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value of the notification sound volume set to the maximum volume. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Then, the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is for the sound generation described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a and adjusting the substrate volume. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjustment is performed, the sub-value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. It is set to a volume value) and flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs. When a notification sound is played in order to notify a clerk of the hall of a misconduct to the speaker, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the muffled sound that flows from the speaker 130 progresses in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after the notification sound has passed the predetermined period. And when the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound started to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It started to flow again from the place where it progressed.

[7-2-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is for playing game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of the differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which it is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

The audio data transmitting IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential data serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be spread. As such an effect, for example, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 on December 25, or the New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED type backlight. .. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of 100% to 70% of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 5% increments, and the currently set game. And the brightness of the LEDs, which are the backlights of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, are included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

Peripheral control MPU4150a, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is of the cold cathode tube type, the ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and date and hour, minute and second.

As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of an LED type, input date information, and the like. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big-hit gaming state occurs with a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer waits and the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is adapted to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is desired. The brightness can be adjusted. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is mounted. A decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for controlling and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, an additional 85% of the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is turned on.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and it will be described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-2-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob to adjust the volume of music or sound effect that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is pivotally operated, and the peripherally controlled A/D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the knob portion 4140a is a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) are controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 that are housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. .. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to the game effect (for example, announcing that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or that the game state will be advantageous to the player. A notification sound for playing, etc.) also flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are rotated by the knob operation. The volume flow from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound controller 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) by a program. ing.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, it is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is committing a fraudulent activity. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to increase the volume of the flow of the sound and to add the music and the sound effect to the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as a more powerful one. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer waits and the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is adapted to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. .. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the sound source with built-in sound source VDP4160a, and the effect sound is changed. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the store clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operating unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period of operation, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. With this, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when the clerk in the hall feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect, the operation unit 400 It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, 10 times). ), the volume adjusted by the player who was seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and was playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game and feels the adjusted volume is small and cannot hear the music or the sound effect, A player who sits down to play a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. ..

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). Further, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling the effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[8-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. 15, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display device 1185, the special symbol 1 variation pattern, the special symbol 1 symbol type, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end, and the command named the state designation at the time of variation are configured. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 1 variation pattern command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is for specifying the deviation, the specific big hit, and the non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change time state designation command is the game state (high probability state, time saving) at the start of change of special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is a command indicating a game state). The variation state designation command is a value in which the gaming state and the mode value correspond to each other, and is transmitted when the variation starts or when the gaming state switches. The other special figure 1 entrainment effect-related commands include a special figure 1 fluctuation type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) that specifies the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, the special figure 1 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 variation pattern command, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed). In addition, the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 variation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 variation pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it is composed of a special figure 2 variation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command and the like named special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, "B*H" is assigned as the status, and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is for specifying the deviation, the specific big hit, and the non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect. Further, as in the case of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is transmitted at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special figure 2 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 variation pattern, and the special figure 2 tuning effect The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Further, as described above, also in the case of the special figure 2 as in the case of the special figure 1, the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big winning ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit opening display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 15 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (shown in FIG. 8 of the attacker unit 2100). It is for instructing the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the special winning opening 1 (the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 rounds are being closed or start of closing), and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been detected (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11, The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command is for instructing to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for instructing the jackpot symbol information display. is there.

In the jackpot ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the jackpot. For example, if the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability non-time saving game state, the mode value is set to "01H", and if the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability time shortening game state, the mode value is "04H". The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Also, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the game state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-time saving gaming state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery. Therefore, the main control board 4100 side is likely to have a high probability or a low ending. May be designated. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 may select the ending without designating the ending with the big hit ending command.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open). The small hit count display command is for a small hit medium big winning opening winning effect (during a small hit, when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hitting ending command is a command to start the small hitting ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). When the winning opening 2103 is opened), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is closed), and the big winning is given. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is a count switch). 2110), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the special winning opening is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). It

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-large winning opening (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the power-on category is made up of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned with "D*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 15 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the one shown in FIG.

The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it is for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. is there).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear at the time of power-on of the main control board and RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when the power is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described below is executed and the periphery of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal pattern display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the device 1189, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned status "E*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 15 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the one shown in FIG.

The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the universal figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the ordinary symbol designating command is for specifying the detachment, the short opening hit, the long opening hit, The universal figure synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the universal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state specification command is to instruct a probability and a time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation time) is transmitted, and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called "Opening per figure", "Opening the universal communication", and "Ending per figure". These various commands are assigned status "F*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 15 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the one shown in FIG.

The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the per-university-universal opening command is transmitted at the start of per-universal-university opening, and the general-universal-open display command is issued when the general-universal-open (when the pair of movable pieces 2106 is driven by the starter solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display category is composed of a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door opening command, and a door closing command. ing. A status of “6*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 15 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, those shown in FIGS. 15 and 16.

The winning abnormality display command is for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the special winning opening is won other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is for instructing to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Is for instructing to start the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display when a disconnection/short-circuit of the electric connection of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11 is abnormal. In this case, the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

Further, the door opening command causes the door frame 5 to open to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame is closed, the door frame opening command is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in the state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When it is in the opened state, it gives an instruction for the body frame opening, and the body frame closing command causes the body frame 3 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch. When it is in the state of being instructed, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize-winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening except during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is issued from among the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. , Which is transmitted when a wire break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in the state of being opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), the door frame is opened. The closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch), The closing command is transmitted when the closing of the main body frame is detected (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display section is made up of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown in FIG. 16 and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 16, “7*H” is set. The status is set and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation nav command is sent at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame status 2 command is restored when power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the one shown in FIG.

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 12). Various boards such as the decorative drive amplifier board 194 are inspected.

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described below is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is executed.

[8-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 16, starting mouth winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command called special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. To these various commands, “9*H” and “5*H” are assigned as statuses, and “**H” (“H” is a hexadecimal number) is assigned as mode (“*” is a specific Is a hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the one shown in FIG.

The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening. Based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, when a game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102, the player instructs a winning in the starting opening. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is for instructing a state transition from the fluctuation reduction operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The high probability end designation command is for instructing a state transition from a high probability state to a low probability state. Special symbol 1 storage command, special symbol 1 hold 0-4 (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191) The number of balls that have not been used yet (reserved number)). Special symbol 2 storage command, special symbol 2 hold 0-4 (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191) The number of balls that have not been used yet (reserved number)). The normal symbol storage command is 0-4 normal symbols 1 reserved (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. It is to convey the number of balls not held (the number of reserves).

The special symbol 1 hold number designation command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number increases (when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the hold number increases). The special symbol 2 hold number designation command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation hold ball number increases (when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the hold number increases). Further, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and prefetched when the upper bits of the mode value are "0". Represents none. If the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is prefetched, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191, the special symbol is prefetched. 1 A pre-reading effect start is instructed to notify the advance notice of the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the hold. Similarly, in the case where the special symbol 2 hold number designation command is prefetched, before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191, it is prefetched. The pre-reading effect start is instructed to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display device 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold. The symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command and the variation type pre-reading command are transmitted when the special symbol holding number designation command is transmitted. In addition, you may make it transmit these commands only when the special symbol reservation number designation command has a pre-reading.

The symbol type pre-read command is used to specify a deviation, a specific big hit, and a non-specific big hit during pre-reading. The variation pattern prefetch command is for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern) in the mode at the time of prefetching. The variation type prefetch command is for specifying the variation type in the mode at the time of prefetching.

Normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, before the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, pre-read and by the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol hold This is an instruction to start the prefetching effect for notifying the advance notice of the display result. Further, as for the normal symbol, a normal symbol storage command corresponding to prefetching, a normal symbol type prefetch command, and a normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command may be prepared. In addition, unless otherwise specified, when simply referred to as “look-ahead”, it means the look-ahead of the special symbol.

Further, in the case of performing the prefetch determination, as will be described later, the same processing as at the start of fluctuation is performed to generate a command including an effect pattern and a pattern. Since the peripheral control board 4140 that receives the command cannot distinguish between the start of variation and the start winning a prize, only the status value is changed while keeping the mode value the same.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting mouth 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting mouth switch 3022, or a lower starting mouth switch). When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The speaker 130 provided in FIG. 5 mainly sends a voice notification to that effect, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designating command is issued at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the fluctuation reduction of the specified number of times is completed (delay stop period elapses). Sent later). The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the out-of-limit stop period) after the fluctuation is determined, which has consumed the high-probability number in the case of “high probability N times”.

The special symbol 1 memory command is used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol indicator 1185 on the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol still). In the state where there is not a hold number, when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185. (When the number of holdings decreases). Special symbol 2 memory command, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the special symbol indicator 1186 under the function display board 1191 is still used for variable display of the special symbol In the state where there is not a hold number, when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display device 1186. (When the number of holdings decreases). Normal symbol storage command, when the number of normal symbol 1 operation holding ball changes (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the number of holding not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191) In a certain state, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings by using the normal symbol display device 1189 for variable display of ordinary symbols. ) Is sent to. You may make it transmit the normal symbol reservation number designation command which changes with the presence or absence of pre-reading also about a normal symbol like a special symbol. Like the special symbol, the presence or absence of pre-reading is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

The normal symbol type prefetch effect command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 and the holding number increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, like the normal symbol variation pattern pre-reading command and the normal symbol type pre-reading command, it may be transmitted separately to the variation pattern of the normal symbol and the pre-reading command related to the symbol type of the normal symbol. .. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type prefetch effect command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol holding number designation command is transmitted, but it is not necessary to limit to it, and if it is predetermined, the normal symbol type prefetch effect command is normally It may be transmitted before the symbol reservation number designation command. Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, the same applies to the case of transmitting a pre-reading command relating to a variation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol variation pattern pre-reading command) and a symbol type of the normal symbol (normal symbol type pre-reading command).

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109. When a game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of the), a speaker accommodated in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly emits the sound. Although it is transmitted in order to notify that, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the voice notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraud is monitored. It is also designed to be used for On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

In addition to the commands described above, for example, a game machine related information command for transmitting game machine related information including model information of the game machine may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined trigger. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can execute effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, when there is a model that executes the pre-reading effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the pre-reading effect, the main control board is configured to always send the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command to the peripheral control board 4140. Then, the peripheral control board 4140, based on the game machine related information command, when it is determined that it is a model capable of executing the pre-reading effect based on the normal symbol hold, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect transmitted from the main control board 4100. While the command is processed as a valid command to enable the universal figure prefetching effect to be executable, when it is determined that the model is not able to execute the universal figure prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With such a configuration, even if there is a model that can execute the universal figure prefetching effect and a model that cannot execute the universal figure prefetching effect, the processing in the main control board 4100 can be shared.

It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process that is executed only once when the power is turned on (any one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Good, multiple times during the game (at the time of winning the start mouth, at the start of fluctuations, when the jackpot (in the case of a general figure, when it hits), when the game condition changes, etc.) May be transmitted. The transmission at the time of turning on the power may be performed as long as the processing is executed at the time of turning on the power, and is not limited to being transmitted during the processing at the time of turning on the power. For example, a game machine related information command is generated when the power is turned on and stored in the command buffer in advance, and stored in the command buffer while the regular processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the processing when the power is turned on is being executed. It also includes the transmission of the amusement machine related information command.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, if the effect that can be executed in the peripheral control board 4140 is processed as a valid command, and if the effect cannot be executed, It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even if the performance to be executed differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is possible to share the control program of the main control board 4100, and to develop the control program of the main control board 4100 for each model. It is not necessary to do it, and it is possible to shorten the development period and shorten the testing period at the testing organization.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then each process such as the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit used for determining an initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for determining initial value for determination, and a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to reach (leach out) when the big hit game state is not generated, upper special symbol display device 1185 and lower special symbol Random display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the display device 1186, and is derived by the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when the jackpot gaming state is generated. A big hit symbol random number used to determine the big hit symbol to be displayed and a big hit symbol initial value determination random number used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number are prepared. The above-mentioned big hit symbol random number is a small hit symbol random number used to determine the small hit symbol which is derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the small hit game state is generated. Also used as. On the other hand, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol, which is used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for ordinary symbol per determination for use in determining whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106, and for determining an initial value of the regular random number for per symbol determination A random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination and a random number for normal symbol variable display pattern for use in determining a variable display pattern of a normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 are prepared.

For example, a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is configured by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from a minimum value to a maximum value by a predetermined arithmetic expression ( In the present embodiment, updating is performed according to a certain rule so that all values appear within the value 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767 as the maximum value. This makes it possible to extract a random number value without bias. The random number value is updated based on the internal system clock of 10 MHz obtained by dividing the 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator by 2 in the main control MPU 4100a. Furthermore, when the update of the random number sequence for one period is completed, the sequence of the random number sequence of the new period is updated so as to be different from the random number sequence of another period. In this way, the arrangement of the random number sequence generated for each cycle is different, which makes it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

The above-described random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the minimum value 0 to the maximum value 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time the main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value (value 0) toward the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Every time the big hit determination random number is updated for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit determination random number is determined based on the big hit determination initial value determination random number, and the determined start value The sequential update is repeated again from. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the same method as the update method of the random number for big hit determination described above.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, as described above, for the big hit determination initial value determination The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the sequential update is repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. The value of the checksum obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU4100a as a numerical value in the processing at the time of turning on the main control side, which will be described later (sum). (Value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off process (power-off) on the main control side. As the big hit determination random number, an ID code which is a value different for each main control MPU 4100a set for each main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and is set as a start value of the big hit determination random number based on the taken out ID code. The big hit determination random number is updated from this start value. Therefore, the initial value derivation process for deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is always executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for jackpot determination is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set in the big hit determination random number is derived by using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. It is stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a, and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM. By doing so, it is analyzed that a two-step security measure is taken by the second security measure that the start value of the big hit determination random number always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a based on the ID code. Are prevented. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the jackpot determination random number may be set by extracting the hardware random number described above. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to set different start values for the big hit determination random numbers every time even with the same game board, and it is possible to further enhance security.

Here, an advantage that an ID code is taken out from a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and the taken ID code is used as an initial value of the big hit determination random number will be described. For example, an ID code pre-stored in a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball, obtains the game board 4 and disassembles it by some method. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other even if the ID code is uniquely assigned to identify the individual. Since it has been done, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value match is completely different from that of the game board 4 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless on another game board, that is, another pachinko game machine, so the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing is obtained. Even if an attempt is made to generate a power failure at each interval and to enter a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 at each predetermined interval, the big hit game state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
The initial value update type counter fetches an ID code from the non-volatile storage means incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when RAM is cleared), and based on the fetched ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is set, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value in the first cycle. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is performed and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained in the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value in the lottery. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained from the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination updates the predetermined fixed numerical value range from the value 0 as the minimum value to the value 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. It is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 is set at a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 is set at a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random number values that are a big hit (random number for big hit determination) is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random number values that are a big hit (random number for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values to be acquired at the same time is 200 unless the acquisition timing of random number values is different. Other than this, for example, the number is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the random number for jackpot determination is different in acquisition time of the random number value, the number of random number values for the jackpot can be set to be not a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, a big hit determination random number of the number (50) obtained by dividing the number (200) of big hit symbols with low probability by 4.

Considering the case where such a range of big hit judgment value is set, the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. The value is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between and. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) of, the former period has a much lower probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (the value 209 for low probability and the value 339 for high probability) in the range of large hit determination values (big hit determination range). And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter one. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started up by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating a radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. When a cheating act that pretends to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting mouth 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is equal to any value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability that

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value side, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0, before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period from the time of reaching the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability), and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). Comparing with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is extremely higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, the value before the first value in the range of big hit determination values (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Comparing the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to a value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values will be set as the value randomly selected by the initial value selection process and will be set in the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination described above. It will count up and then count up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , The value obtained from the lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the intermediate value (the value 16384) from the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side. If it is set to a range close to, the value before the first value (low hit value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (low hit value) The period leading up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is raised by illicitly acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to have entered the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the ranges of the big hit judging value (big hit judging range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) in the range of big hit judgment values (first hit value) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of big hit judgment values (first hit value) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. In the third cycle from the time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the fourth cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. As described above, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity The player will not be able to detect it.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process of this embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. To do. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer and stacks the contents of the register, the return address, etc. on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing +24V and the reference voltage or comparing +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, with its logic set to LOW, through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC can be set until the latched state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure notice signal.

In step S14, if there is no input of the power failure notification signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notification voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, the main control program causes the power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic of the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip-flop MIC in the latch state. The D type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal thereof is latched.

Subsequent to step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 4100a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 when the operation switch 952 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. In this state (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) of the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when erasing game information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer processing 2, the system for controlling the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 7 is activated ( Waiting until it boots). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in main control side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally completed, the main-control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 0, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" means that, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, the high frequency is detected and reset, It also includes the state of returning after that.

Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program is executing the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value as an initial value from the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control MPU4100a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the thumb values do not match, or the main control side power off processing When the process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and based on the taken-out ID code, the jackpot determination random number is updated from the fixed numerical range of the counter. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as the big hit determination initial value determination random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number described above.

Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 15 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and the peripheral The test commands divided into the test related shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control program, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the error release navigation command of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) is operated. Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input according to the operation of the operation switch 952, as described above, by using the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the power-on time. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storage unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage section to be described later) is caused to function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S50). In the non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, a random number that is not related to winning/judging determination (big hit determination) is updated. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether there is an input of a power failure warning signal, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, a non-winning random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets the interrupt inhibition setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is a starting opening solenoid 2105, attacker solenoids 2108A, 2108B, upper special symbol display device 1185, lower special symbol display device 1186, upper special symbol memory display device 1184, lower special symbol memory display device. The drive signal output to 1187, the normal symbol display device 1189, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the game status display device 1183, the round display device 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Subsequent to step S58, the main control program sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control program in the main control board 4100 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S70). At this time, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to the value B subsequent to the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the generation of other interrupts is allowed. Further, the clearing of the interrupt flag may be executed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. By doing so, multiple interrupts caused by other interrupts occurring during the timer interrupt process are prevented from being performed, so that management of the interrupt process is further simplified.

Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program enters, for example, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 and the special winning opening 2103. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper starting port 2101, and a detection signal that detects a game ball that has entered a lower starting port 2102. A detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109, a detection signal from a gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, which informs that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the control processing, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Moreover, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 which detects the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102 are read respectively. Then, the corresponding starting mouth winning commands shown in FIG. 15 and corresponding thereto are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, The starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. Those that do not have the same result are treated as having no game ball entered.

As described above, in the switch input processing, the main control program first detects the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. By performing twice reading a total of two times, that is, reading twice for comparing the third time and reading twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time, erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is increased. be able to.

Following step S74, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process which will be described later, and the normal symbol described later and In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 normally issues various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal pattern fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number updating process (step S78). In this winning random number update processing, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 17, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for initial value determination for the big hit symbols and the random numbers for initial value determination for the small hit symbols are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Will count up.

For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random number updating method, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control side power-on process (main control) shown in FIG. 17 for the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number Side win process), the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 and the winning random number updating process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the main routine, are respectively updated, but this routine is executed each time an interrupt timer occurs. If the number of times the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 is executed is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50.

Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the main control program reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information, or with the main control board 4100. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. This main control program sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main pay serial data.

Further, in the prize ball control processing, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103, for example. The detection information based on the detection signal is written in each corresponding definition bit area defined continuously by 1 bit for the number of the special winning opening 2103, and for example, 15 balls as a prize ball. A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that the payout is to be made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

In the present embodiment, since two special winning openings 2103 are provided as the special winning openings, the main control program uses a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the definition bit areas described above. From each of them, the two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, they are referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in order. It should be noted that in the case of a game board in which the number of special winning openings is 1, for example, one definition bit area is used. The definition bit areas used are 1 bit, for example, and are areas adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area, which is the fourth bit, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted by writing, for example, "0", and prepares to receive the next game ball.

Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area to check. For example, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 is the 4th bit, the main control program of the pachinko gaming machine provided with only one special winning opening as in the present embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires the information of the definition bit area of the 4th bit.

Further, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information thus obtained according to the effective range of the prize ball of the special winning opening 2103, which will be described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether the payout control board 4110 should not be output. When it is determined that the prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a compulsory masking process on each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

In this prize ball control processing, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, Upon being written in the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above is created. Write in. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then causes the peripheral control board 4140 to transmit the winning sound command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, for example. The sound "Pokon" is output.

On the other hand, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103 If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out, for example. In this case as well, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-described transmission information storage area, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110, whereby the payout of gaming balls is allowed. To do.

At this time, the main control program, when the game balls are paid out in excess of the specified payout number that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, the excessive prize winning command (not shown in FIG. 16 is omitted. ) Is written in the transmission information storage area and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

By doing so, the illegal payout of the game balls is substantially prevented, so that damage to the game hall (game hall) can be suppressed to a minimum.

On the other hand, the main control program, instead, when the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103 is detected, immediately writes the excessive prize winning command in the transmission information storage area, and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Alternatively, the speaker may be informed.

After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

As described above, when the game ball is received at the special winning opening 2103, it is possible to hear and confirm whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

On the other hand, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program causes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to operate. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error clear navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) divided into status displays. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception processing described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to the effect is sent to the payout control board 4110, and output information is stored in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 16 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S84). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 2103 by the count switch 2110 when not in the jackpot gaming state, the main control program is A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability varying state based on the big hit symbol random value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability variation state is shifted to, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, it is shifted to a game state other than the probability variation state (winning probability control means). Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state). The details of the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control program, according to the type of special symbol, according to the variable display pattern determined at the time of starting winning, set the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol indicator 1185, or the lower special symbol indicator. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light the 1186, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In addition, the main control program, for example, when shifting to the big hit game state, various commands classified as the big hit shown in FIG. 15 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A close display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the attacker solenoid 2108A or the opening/closing member 2107 is opened/closed. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control program, when the number of times (rounds) the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is twice, the two-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on for two rounds. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is 6, the 6-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 12 round display lamp is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the round is 16 times, the 16 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is set. The output of the lighting signal to the 16-round display lamp is set to be turned on, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 so as to light the presence or absence of the transition to the probability variation state in a predetermined color, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, with the start winning of the game ball as a trigger, after that the special symbols start changing display and the jackpot lottery is executed, and the predetermined winning condition is established and the predetermined probability transition. If the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability variation lamp as the game state indicator is changed and the state is changed to the probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the probability of the jackpot lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the jackpot is won. In this way, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state ends, mainly, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit, as if the big hit game loops. What behaves like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machine"), and the probability fluctuation state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes to a predetermined number after the jackpot game is over (hereinafter "ST (special time) machine That is)) exists. In such a pachinko gaming machine of a model in which the probability fluctuation state continues differently, the control of the above-mentioned gaming status display is different, and at the development stage, the control of the gaming status display must be designed for each model. It was difficult to improve the development efficiency.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the main control program subsequently determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case, while shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, if the winning condition is met and the probability transition condition is further met, the probability that the winning condition will be fulfilled is relatively higher than in the normal gaming state. The state of the game state display 1183 is turned on while the state is changed to a high probability changing state. After that, when the winning condition is met again and the probability variation transition condition is met again, the main control program sets the display mode of the gaming state display 1183 in a state where the probability variation state is continued to a certain interrupt cycle. After the lighted state is once turned off, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on again from the unlit state within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

More specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. (Lottery means) If the winning condition is satisfied, the normal game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, while if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The probability is shifted to a probability varying state in which the probability is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). The main control program sets the display mode of the game status display 1183 to a lighting state while the probability variation state continues, while displaying the game state display 1183 when transitioning to a game state other than the probability variation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program sets the display mode of the game state display 1183 to a lighting state upon the transition to the above-mentioned probability variation state, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is once turned off from the lit state within a certain specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (lighting state continuation control means). In this way, even though the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed for a very short time, It is possible to make the display state of the game state display 1183 unchanged for the player's eyes.

In this way, due to the display mode of the game status indicator 1183, it is difficult for the player's eyes to visually recognize that the lighting state has once been turned off, and it is visually recognized as if the lighting state continues. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the special symbol has a prescribed number of variations after the jackpot game state ends. Along with the so-called ST (special time) machine, which shifts to the stochastic fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation count, a program code for controlling the display mode of the game status indicator 1183 between different models. Can be shared. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko game machines of different models.

Further, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program (game control means), while the winning condition is satisfied as described above, while shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, If the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probability variation game state as an example of the specific game state is also transitioned (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to a probability variation game state as an example of a specific game state without substantially paying out the game balls in the big hit game state. The specific game state may be a state in which a time saving operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and a time saving function is operating, or both the games at the same time in combination with the probability variation game state described above. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of variable display times of special symbols during the period from one gaming state to another gaming state, and sends the gaming state information indicating the managed gaming state to the transmission information. By writing in the transmission information storage area as, the transmission is performed in the command transmission processing S92 described later within the same timer interrupt period (game state notification means).

Specifically, the main control program, if the above-mentioned probability variation transition conditions are satisfied, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, the special symbols are variably displayed until the game state shifts to the normal gaming state. Information about the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is included in any command that is transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern, and is sent. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, it is transmitted in the command transmission processing S92 described later within the same timer interrupt period (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the above-described remaining number information in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes, is generally called by a CALL instruction included in the main routine, and after the program code group included in this program module is executed, It is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction. In such a case, it is difficult to reduce the program capacity at first glance because the called-back instruction is required.

However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes consecutive subroutines, for example, after the main routine calls the first subroutine with the CALL instruction and executes it, the next subroutine is further continuously called with another CALL instruction. Alternatively, the return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S88). Details of the normal symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the gate passing processing is performed based on this input information. In the gate passage process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Remember.

Further, following the gate passage process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination from the read gate information to build the main control. It is determined whether or not it coincides with a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). The main control program determines whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (the result of the ordinary lottery). In the main control program, when the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened to enter the game state in which the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102, which is advantageous for the player. Move to.

Further, the main control program determines the variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination, based on the value of the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and classifies it in relation to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. Various commands to be created are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is lit according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol to turn on the normal symbol display device 1189. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

In addition, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination taken out is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, it is related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. Various commands are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106, and the output information described above is output information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number that has been taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the above random symbol variation display pattern random number Based on the normal pattern variation display pattern is determined, various commands classified into the general figure synchronization effect-related shown in FIG. 15 is created, stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the determined ordinary The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set so that the ordinary symbol display device 1189 is lit according to the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information when the various commands from the payment control board 4110 are normally received. A starter solenoid that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when in the big hit game state, and opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition to outputting a driving signal to 2105, 2 round big hit information output signal, 6 round big hit information output signal, 12 round big hit information output signal, 16 round big hit information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to games such as information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads out transmission information such as commands and data from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 (command. Transmission method). This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine, which are shown in FIG. 15, and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, and various kinds of special figure 2 tuning effect-related. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot-related (for example, a special winning opening 1 count corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified into power-on, various commands classified into general figure synchronization effect related, various commands classified into ordinary electric figure effect related, various classified into notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command and frame state 2 command), test Various commands classified as related and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

The command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 is of a type in which the command previously stored for the ring buffer is output first as a command transmission buffer. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, since the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process (step S86) is executed after the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process (step S88) are executed, the special symbol related prefetching is performed. By storing the command in the buffer for command transmission before the general-reading-related read-ahead command, the special-drawing-related read-ahead command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the general-drawing-related read-ahead command. It

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit) A frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted to (the error command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, And sends an error release navigation command (second error release command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error release navigation command of the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( The main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame opening command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140( A body frame closing command (second body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (body frame command sending means, second body frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as a main body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door close command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door close command having the form shown in FIG.

Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. When the main control-side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers onto the stack by hardware and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special symbols and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbols and special electric auditors product control processing in the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed in the processing of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit determination random number by +1 by a counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, that is, With the start winning as a trigger (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out as the big hit random number value for each start stored information (start information) where this start condition is satisfied, and this big hit random number value is the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value previously stored in the built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is satisfied). To shift from the normal game state to the big hit game state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and these are collectively referred to as a game state.

Incidentally, the main control program, when determining the big hit game mode, as data for defining the mode of the big hit game set in the big hit game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening for each round, One of the main control built-in RAM specified by an address that is offset by definition data (table) that indicates the closing time of the special winning opening for each round and the winning number limit count of the game balls. It is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the copy. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the lower special winning opening (big winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When the game ball wins the lower major prize opening (result of step S100 is "yes"), a large winning mouth prize designating command indicating that the lower major prize opening is won is set (step S102).

Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won the upper special winning opening (big winning opening 2) (step S104). When the game ball is won in the upper special winning opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the upper special winning opening is won is set (step S106). It should be noted that whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 2110. Furthermore, when setting each prize designation command, it is not limited to detection by the count switch, and each prize designation command when the corresponding special winning opening is opened and detected by the count switch. May be set. As a condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state, it may be in the game state related to S142 to S146, or the special symbol/special electric auditors product operation number corresponds to S142 to S146. It may be that there is.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper gate (role combination operation gate) (step S112). When the game ball has passed the upper gate (the result of step S112 is "yes"), a winning combination operation gate passage command indicating that the game ball has passed the upper gate is set (step S110).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting winning opening (upper opening 2101 and lower starting opening 2102). First, the starting opening 1 identification value is set in the starting opening identification area indicating the starting opening that is the target of the winning determination (step S112).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101 (step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022. Specifically, the presence/absence of a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is performed based on the input information entered.

The main control MPU 4100a, when the game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101 (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting port winning time process (step S116). In the starting mouth winning process, the starting mouth winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, the random number for jackpot determination etc. is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special symbol. The process for executing the prefetching effect is executed. The details of the processing for winning the starting opening will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the starting opening 2 identification value in the starting opening identifying area (step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the lower starting opening 2102 (step S120). When the game ball is won in the lower starting opening 2102 (the result of step S120 is "yes"), the starting opening winning time process is executed as in the case of the upper starting opening 2101 (step S122). The starting opening 1 identification value and the starting opening 2 identification value are processing for starting opening winning a prize so that it is possible to perform processing for starting opening winning a prize that is common to both upper starting opening winning and lower starting opening winning. It is information for identifying whether the processing being executed is based on the winning process by the upper starting opening or the lower winning opening processing based on each identification value in the reference, and is referred to in the starting opening winning processing or It is a value that is set in order to identify the set data table and the area for storing winning information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol/electric auditors product operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process executed according to the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress status variable is stored in the game progress status storage area of the main control built-in RAM and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transition process is finished, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control The process ends. The value of the game progress status variable stored in the game progress status storage area is game information, and thus is backed up in the main power supply side power-off process.

In the step S130 process, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), a special symbol variation process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), a special Out-of-symbol stop process (step S136), special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), interval process before special winning opening opening (step S140), big winning opening opening process (step S142), big winning opening closing process (step S144) ), a special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), a winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148) or a winning combination operation gate valid process (step S150).

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102, the variation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186. A process for starting the display is performed.

In the special symbol variation process (step S132), the process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, whether or not the special symbol that starts the fluctuation and stops fixedly causes the big hit gaming state. Whether or not it is determined.

In the special symbol disengagement stop processing (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display device 1185 or the lower special symbol display device 1186 is stopped, and the process of notifying that effect is performed. To do.

In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when generating a big hit game state, stop the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186, and give notice to that effect. To do.

In the special winning opening pre-opening interval process (step S140), a process for generating a jackpot gaming state and notifying that the jackpot operation is started is performed.

In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), the opening/closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state to perform a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103.

In the process for closing the special winning opening (step S144), the opening/closing member 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state to perform a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103.

In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying the fact is performed.

In the winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148) or the winning combination operation gate valid process (step S150), the upper gate (winning combination operation gate) is validated, and passage of a game ball at the upper gate is detected. ..

[9-6. Processing at the time of winning opening]
Next, the starting mouth winning process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process for winning the starting mouth in the present embodiment. The process for winning the winning opening is executed by the processes of steps S116 (upper starting port 2101) and S122 (lower starting port 2102) in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process shown in FIG.

In the starting mouth winning time process, the starting mouth winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the upper starting mouth 2101 or the lower starting mouth 2102. At this time, the start winning combination command may be set for each starting winning combination, or may be common regardless of the starting winning combination. The main control program stores the command thus created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

First, the main control program sets, as command data, start mouth winning command creation data for creating a start mouth winning command (step S200), and executes a command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, a start opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The command at the time of winning the winning opening of the present embodiment is common regardless of the winning opening.

Further, the main control program sets the control data table at the time of winning opening corresponding to the winning opening based on the starting opening 1 identification value or the starting opening 2 identification value selected before the start opening winning process is started. Yes (step S204). The data required for the processing executed at the time of starting winning is stored in the starting mouth winning time control data table. Hereinafter, the control data table at the time of the winning opening will be described.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a starting mouth winning time control data table in the present embodiment. The starting mouth winning time control data table defines a starting mouth winning time control data table 1 set when the upper starting mouth 2101 wins and a starting opening winning time control data table 2 set when the lower starting mouth 2102 wins. .. Each table defines a special symbol holding number command address table, a special symbol operation holding number area, a holding history special figure identification value and a holding information storage area reference offset value, and has the same structure.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the processing of step S204, based on the identification value set in the processing of step S112 or step S118, the head of the starting mouth winning time control data table corresponding to the winning starting winning opening The address is set as the control data address. As a result, since the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the start address of the set starting mouth winning control data table, the data corresponding to the starting mouth is processed in common by the upper starting mouth and the lower starting mouth. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the operation reserved number of balls address set in the starting mouth winning time control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reserved ball number address corresponds to the operation reserved ball number address (special symbol operation reserved ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation reserved ball number address is acquired as the reserved ball number.

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) or more (step S208). When the number of reserved balls is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (result of step S208 is "yes"), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program increments the number of reserved balls by 1 (step S210). Furthermore, 1 is added to the special symbol total operation reserved number (content of the special symbol total operation reserved number area), which is the sum of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number (step S212).

Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol reserved storage area) of various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number extracted by the start winning. Here, the structure of the special symbol hold storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol holding storage area (source code) related to the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. 23. On the right side of each row of FIG. 23, the line described as "special symbol 1" is a special symbol reservation storage area related to the upper starting opening 2101 and the line described as "special symbol 2". Is a special symbol holding storage area for the lower starting opening 2102. Further, in the case of the "random number storage N area for special symbol 1 variation pattern", "N" corresponds to the number of reservations. One corresponding random value is stored in each area.

Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an added value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is added to the reserved storage area index value (offset value for referring to the reserved information storage area). ) Is added. The reserved storage area index value is "00H" if the value of the starting opening identification area is the starting opening 1 identification value, and if the starting opening 2 identification value is the special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area, the offset value ( _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the big hit determination random number. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by common processing even if the starting ports are different. Further, it is possible to store the data in different storage areas by changing the index value depending on the timing of executing the common processing. For example, when performing the big hit determination at the time of pre-reading processing and at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to store information necessary for the big hit determination in different storage areas by setting different index values.

Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the big hit determination random number in the special symbol holding storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (the counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the number of holding balls. Also, in addition to the big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, reach judgment random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random numbers 2, fluctuation type random numbers), special symbol random numbers A random number for determining the winning/jumping determination or the variation pattern is extracted at the time of winning at the starting mouth and is stored in the corresponding storage area. For example, if the special symbol 1 number of reserved balls is 0, the designated storage location is B_HIT_M1 as the start address, the big hit determination random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach determination random number is T_RIT_M1, and the variation pattern random number 1 is In T_HP1_M1, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP2_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

Then, the main control program, based on the special symbol total operation pending number, special symbol identification value for selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation in the new pending storage, the corresponding pending identification history area (special symbol pending identification Area (area) (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of 1 byte from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and the special symbol total operation hold number from the special symbol hold identification area 1 is 1 The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes the area corresponding to the new pending storage. The special identification value is included in the control data table for starting winning a prize set in the process of step S204. The special symbol hold identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper starting mouth (special symbol 1) or the lower starting mouth (special symbol 2), and at the start of fluctuation, the value of the top area of the special symbol hold identifying area By determining, it is determined whether or not the variation of the special symbol can be started.

Finally, the main control program executes a memory pre-reading process for executing the special figure pre-reading effect (step S218). The special figure prefetching effect is an effect in which the lottery result of the special lottery is implied in advance before the variable display of the special symbol is started. In the memory prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before the variable display of the special symbols is started, and information for determining the special symbol prefetching effect on the peripheral control board based on the obtained random number values (winning information, symbol type, fluctuations) A pattern number, etc.) is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At this time, the main control program may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol in the command as information suggesting the type of the big hit game, instead of the lottery result itself of the special lottery. For example, information of the stage before the final determination such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group of the variation patterns, the latent probability hit group, and the small hit group of the symbol types may be transmitted as the prefetch command. Details of the memory prefetch processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Memory prefetch processing]
Next, details of the memory pre-reading process (step S218) in the starting mouth winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch processing in this embodiment. In the memory pre-reading process, a process for executing pre-reading for previously acquiring the result of the special lottery is performed. Based on the result of the special lottery obtained by the memory prefetch process, by sending a predetermined command (special symbol holding number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140, the result before the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute the suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

When the memory pre-reading process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) (step S240). Further, a hold command without prefetch is set as a hold command (step S242).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern changes at the timing of the start winning and the timing at which the variation actually starts (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern is different at the time of starting winning and at the time of starting the variation, and if the table for selecting the variation pattern is different, the prefetching is prohibited. For example, the number of times the game is maintained in the time saving state (the number of games) or the number of times the game is maintained in the variation table (the number of games) is the upper limit number of the reserved numbers (for example, when the special symbol is 1 and the upper limit number of the reserved numbers is 4 4 times, in the case of 2 special symbols, when the total value of the upper limit numbers of each number of reservations is 8 times, even if there are 2 special symbols, one symbol is given priority and the variable display is started. In this case, pre-reading is prohibited if the number is less than the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (result of step S244 is “yes”), the main control program executes the process of step S282 and subsequent steps without executing the process of prefetching.

On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether or not the prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not it is the prefetch determination prohibition period is determined based on the advance notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, set the advance notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning opening (set value of the starting opening identification area), and advance notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol/electric accessory operation number, time saving medium flag To get If the acquired advance notice permission determination data is "00H" (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if it is "01H" (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. The advance notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the advance notice permission determination data, (A) shows an example of the advance notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of the advance notice permission determination data. In the notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. Further, as the notice permission determination data, data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) are defined.

As the basic structure of the advance notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is the reference source information (lower address of the RAM area of the reference destination), and the third and fourth bytes are prefetched. It is the reference table address for the inhibition period determination. The data of the second to fourth bytes (3 bytes) is used as a basic unit, and the data of this basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, the data for two times is set as the number of times to be referred to, but it goes without saying that the data is not limited to two times and may be one time or three times or more. With such a data structure, it is possible to adapt to any specifications by modifying only the data value without modifying the program code.

For example, if the special symbol/electrical accessory operation number is changing during the special symbol (HEND), the advance notice permission determination data is "00H" (_RENZOCK_OK), and prefetching is permitted. The special symbol/electrical accessory operation number is numerical data, and for example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1, and in addition, it is 0 or the like when waiting for a change in the special symbol (IDOL). If a game ball is won in the upper starting opening 2101, and the time saving state (the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the advance notice prohibition determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as the reference table for the read ahead prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. The value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H”=corresponding to the prefetch determination prohibition period), which is the data on the second line of the advance notice permission determination data 2, is selected, and the prefetch is performed in the determination process of step S246. Regulated. The advance notice permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table of the prefetch prohibition period corresponding to Toku-zu 2, and since the data selection is the same as the advance notice permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), detailed description is omitted. To do.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbols 1 and the special symbols 2 are defined by different determination tables, but if the contents are the same, a common table may be used, or each special symbol may be used. The content may be completely different.

Further, regardless of the determination result based on the notice permission determination data address table, even if it is determined to be the prefetch determination prohibition period in order to prevent the prefetch effect from being duplicated when the special figure prefetch effect is being executed. Good.

Now, let us return to the description of the flow chart of the memory prefetch processing in FIG. In the pre-reading determination prohibition period (result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program executes the process of step S282 and thereafter without performing the pre-reading determination.

On the other hand, if the pre-reading determination prohibition period is not reached (the result of step S246 is "no"), the main control program stores a special symbol holding storage area (a random number for each holding number is stored) corresponding to the winning opening and the number of holding balls. Special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to one reserved random number value stored in (the generic name of the area) (7 bytes worth in the present embodiment) is set special symbol reserved storage buffer (from the big hit determination random number buffer special The random number buffer for symbols is stored (step S248). Then, based on the random number stored in the special symbol reservation storage buffer, the pre-reading determination and the determination at the start of fluctuation are performed. That is, at the time of prefetching, the contents of the special symbol reserved storage area stored corresponding to the number of reservations are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information of the area at the beginning of the special symbol reserved storage area is stored in the buffer. It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of prefetching and at the time of start of variation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as jackpot determination) can be used in common.

The special symbol reserved storage area is, for the special symbol 1 and the hourly symbol 2, a large hit determination random number storage N area, a reach determination random number storage N area, a variation pattern random number 1 storage N area, a variation pattern random number 2 storage N area. , A random type memory N area for variation type and a random number memory N area for special symbols are included (N is 1 to 4). The special symbol reservation storage buffer includes a big hit determination random number buffer, a reach determination random number buffer, a variation pattern random number 1 buffer, a variation pattern random number 2 buffer, a variation type random number buffer, and a special symbol random number buffer.

In the process of step S248, for example, when storing the third reserved storage of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol reserved storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 3 area is a big hit determination random number buffer, Special symbol 1 reach determination random number storage 3 area value for reach determination random number buffer, special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 1 storage 3 area value for variation pattern random number 1 buffer, special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is a random pattern 2 buffer for the variable pattern, the special symbol 1 is a random number memory for the variable type 3 The value of the area is a variable type random number buffer, the special symbol 1 is a random number memory for the special symbol 3 The value of the area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer To do.

Then, the main control program executes the special symbol jackpot determination process of determining the result of the special lottery by referring to each random number stored in the special symbol reservation storage buffer set in the process of step S248 (step S250). .. Details of the special symbol big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Furthermore, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing the big hit flag and the like at the time of prefetch determination. At the start of fluctuation, the jackpot determination result is stored in the jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

In the buffer related to the look-ahead of the special lottery, in addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), a big hit symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variation pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variation type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), a symbol type command buffer ( TZTP_CMBF), special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF) and special symbol operation reserved sphere number buffer (T_SID_CTBF) are included.

As for the ordinary lottery, as in the case of the special lottery, a buffer for prefetching the ordinary lottery is provided. The buffer related to the prefetch of the normal lottery includes a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and a normal symbol operation reserved ball count buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this way, it is possible to make the processing common between prefetching and variation start, as in the case of the special lottery.

Further, the main control program sets the special symbol variation distribution information source address table 1 as the special symbol variation distribution information source address table that holds information for selecting the variation pattern (step S256). Then, the variation pattern selection determination process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type classification value (step S260). S262). The fluctuation type classification value is a parameter for specifying the fluctuation type defined in each fluctuation pattern. One or a plurality of fluctuation types can be defined in one fluctuation pattern. The variation type corresponds to the type of pseudo continuous variation, for example, when the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation is selected. When the fluctuation type classification value is selected, the main control program sets the selected fluctuation type classification value in the fluctuation type classification buffer (step S264).

After that, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent malfunction due to remaining values when performing the big hit determination.

Further, the main control program sets a command indicating the pre-reading result (symbol type pre-reading command, variation pattern pre-reading command and variation type pre-reading command) in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). .. Further, the hold command reference value with prefetch is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (start-up winning control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set hold command reference value, the hold ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired hold ball number command (special symbol hold ball number designating command) is set in the command buffer ( Step S286).

Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designating command) will be further described. In the address of the control data returned in the process of step S282, the address of the starting mouth winning time control data table corresponding to the winning mouth (the value of the starting mouth identifying area) in which the game ball is won is set. As described above, since the structure of the control data table at the time of winning opening is common regardless of the value of the starting identification area, it is possible to make the subsequent processing common.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to the special symbol holding ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol holding ball number command address table, and (B) is an example of a special symbol holding ball number designating command creation table. .. As shown in FIG. 22, the starting mouth winning time control data table includes the address of the special symbol holding ball number command address table (the data (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) set to the start address of each data table). ), it is possible to refer to the special symbol holding ball number command address table from the address.

The main control program is a special symbol 1 holding ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 corresponding to the winning opening or a special symbol 2 holding ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 With reference to the reserved command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved sphere number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved sphere number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26(B), the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is, for each special symbol, a hold command generation table when read-ahead is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), a hold command generation when read-ahead is enabled. Table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

Then, the main control program creates a special symbol holding ball number designating command based on the special symbol holding ball number designating command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol holding ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) consists of 3 bytes of data. The first byte of data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the number of reservations, the second byte of data is the default value of the value set as command mode data, and the third byte of data is the command status data value. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 hold storage number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the hold number is 3), the special symbol holding ball number designation command when there is prefetching, special symbol 1 holding ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created based on. Specifically, the status value is "62H", the mode value is "02H" (holding number 3-1) + "11H" (default value) = "13H", the special symbol holding ball number designation command is "6213H" Becomes Finally, the created special symbol holding ball number specifying command is set in the command buffer.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), the data of the second byte (default value of the mode value) of the special symbol holding ball number designating command creation data is “01H” in the case of read-ahead prohibition, In this case, it is “11H”. Therefore, the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number designating command is "0" in the case of pre-reading inhibition and "1" in the case of pre-reading permission even after the holding number is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140, which has received the special symbol holding sphere number designating command, can determine the presence or absence of prefetch by referring to the mode value of the special symbol holding sphere number designating command. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 waits until it receives the information (command) necessary for executing the special symbol prefetch effect by receiving the special symbol holding ball number designating command and referring to the mode value. You can decide whether or not. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number designating command is "0", it is possible to continue the process without receiving the command related to prefetching. The order of the data structure set in the special symbol holding sphere number designating command creation data is not limited to the described order. For example, the lower address of the storage area that refers to the holding number in the second byte is set. It may be set in a predetermined order. Further, it is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and other information such as accompanying the output of the hold number command may be set as long as it has a predetermined data structure.

[9-8. Special symbol big hit judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol big hit determination process (step S250) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol big hit determination processing in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination process determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start prize. This process is commonly used at the time of pre-reading of the special lottery and at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol (when confirming the fluctuation display).

The main control program first acquires a big hit judging random number from the big hit judging random number buffer (step 300). Then, the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing the special lottery is obtained based on the probability variation flag from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and "00H" is set if the probability is low and "01H" is set if the probability is high. The special symbol big hit judgment lower limit value data is set to a value according to the probability state, the lower limit value data is selected based on the probability variation flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by making the lower limit value data different. Has become.

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). When the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (result of step S304 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, the big hit determination random number is the big hit determination upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of random numbers determined to be a jackpot is the range from the jackpot determination lower limit value to the upper limit value. ing. Therefore, originally, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined as a big hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, a value exceeding the upper limit value is set for the big hit determination random number. Even if you hit, there is a possibility that it will be judged as a big hit. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such malfunctions, comparison is also made with the upper limit value.

When the random number for jackpot determination is not larger than the jackpot determination upper limit value (result of step S306 is “no”), that is, when the jackpot determination random number is less than or equal to the jackpot determination upper limit value, the main control program hits the jackpot flag. The winning is set (step S308). Specifically, a big hit win is set as a flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the jackpot flag storage area is a jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of pre-reading determination.

On the other hand, the main control program, when the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is “yes”) or when the big hit determination random number is larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (step The result of S306 is "yes"), and the big hit flag is set to be non-winning (missing) (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value and smaller than the lower limit value, the jackpot flag is set to a value that is out of the upper limit value. Even if it is set, it is prevented from being mistakenly determined as a big hit. As described above, when the big hit flag is set, the special symbol big hit determination process ends.

[9-9. Special symbol determination processing]
Next, details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol determination processing in the present embodiment. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol is specified based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start prize.

The main control program first acquires a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (step S322). When the content of the big hit flag is not big hit (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is set to the deviation symbol command value (0) (step S330). Furthermore, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is ended.

On the other hand, the main control program, when the contents of the big hit flag is big hit (the result of step S322 is "yes"), based on the big hit symbol random number, from the special symbol determination data address table, the big hit symbol number and the big hit symbol type The number is acquired (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The big hit symbol type number is a number corresponding to the big hit type one-to-one. For example, 16R with a probable variation big jackpot (01H), 16R with a non-probable variation jackpot (02H), 16R without a probable variation, jackpot (no time reduction: latency variation, 03H), 16R without a probable variation jackpot (with time reduction: sudden probability) , 04H), small hit (05H), etc. Further, the jackpot symbol number is a value provided in plural for the symbol type number. For example, for a probability variation big hit with a 16R ball, 01H to 10H, for a non-probability variation jackpot with a 16R ball, 11H to 26H, and for a probability variation jackpot without a 16R ball (without time saving: latent probability variation), 16H, 16R 40H to 55H is provided for the probability variation big hit without a ball (with time reduction: sudden hit), and 56H to 5FH is provided for the small hit. In this way, a plurality of big hit symbol numbers are provided for the same big hit type, which is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 based on the big hit symbol numbers. This is because it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the special symbol (this special symbol). On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, it is not selected from the table, but a predetermined value (missing symbol command value (0)) is set for the missing symbol number.

Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol type number (step S326). Finally, the special symbol number value is set based on the big hit symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is ended.

[9-10. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the memory prefetch process will be described. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process in this embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. It should be noted that this processing is executed at the start of fluctuation as well as at the time of pre-reading, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation.

The main control program first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The variation information source table, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 according to the game state, hit (hit variation selection information state table), out (defect variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), Reach probability (special symbol reach probability table), is a data table in which table information for referring to the variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Then, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Furthermore, based on the number of data for one block of the special symbol identification value and the variable distribution information source table for each special symbol, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable information source table is specified ( Step S344). Then, the hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of prefetching or the special symbol winning flag area at the time of start of variation (for example, 00H : Out, 01H: big hit, 02H: small hit) are acquired (step S346).

The main control program determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is won by judging whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value or the small hit value (step S350). When the big hit or the small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the big hit fluctuation selection information type table is searched from the hit fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag (step S352). At this time, the retrieved addresses of the jackpot variation selection information type table are saved. The jackpot variation selection information type table is a jackpot variation type (variation group at a stage before the jackpot variation pattern is determined, for example, a variation pattern finally determined such as SP1 reach, SP2 reach, etc.). This is a table for selecting groups (grouped together). Depending on whether the result of the special lottery is a small hit or a big hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the value set for the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is a big hit and a small hit. Since different values are set for the big hit, it is possible to select the variation pattern by the common processing for the big hit and the small hit.

Next, the main control program acquires a big hit symbol type (a big hit symbol type buffer at the time of pre-reading, or a value stored in the big hit symbol type area at the time of start of fluctuation) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the variable information number search process in step S358.

Then, the main control program selects the variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table according to the value of the variation special pattern identification area at the time of variation pattern selection. (Step S356). With the variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table, the type for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table from the big hit variation selection information type table is determined based on the value of the (hit) symbol type Table.

Next, the main control program executes the variation information number search process by using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, and thereby the variation information number (from the jackpot variation selection information type table, the variation pattern selection value when hit). A type value for determining the data table) is acquired (step S358). Further, the saved jackpot variation selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). In addition, the variable information number that is the result of the variable information number search process is set as the selected value by the process of step S358 (step S362).

On the other hand, if the main control program has not won the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is “no”), the special symbol reach probability table is set as the search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The state flag is set with numerical data corresponding to the game state, and in the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-time saving (normal game) state), 01H (high probability time saving state), 02H. One of the values (low probability time saving state) and 03H (high probability non time saving state) is set. Thereby, it is possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the game state. Further, based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 the look-ahead or fluctuation), reach determination for determining whether to generate a reach A threshold value is acquired (step S368). Then, the main control program sets the reach variation selection information state table as search data (step S370).

Then, the main control program determines whether or not to reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer and compared with the reach determination threshold value acquired in the process of step S368. Reach is generated when the reach determination threshold value is larger than the reach determination random number.

When the reach is not generated in the variation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets the deviation variation selection information state table as the search data (step S374). Further, the deviation variation selection information holding table corresponding to the status flag is searched from the deviation fluctuation selection information status table (step S376), and the searched deviation fluctuation selection information holding table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 that is the look-ahead or variation) is set to the selected value (step 380).

The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of normal deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of holdings. For example, when the number of holdings is large, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time may be selected as compared with the case where the number is small. The fluctuation pattern table is set so that

On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control program sets the state flag as the selected value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of holdings, but the fluctuation time may be changed depending on the number of holdings as in the case of the normal shift. Specifically, even if the reach variation is the same, the predetermined variation time (for example, the high-speed variation time immediately after the start of the variation) may be adjusted when the number of holdings is large as compared with the case where the number is small. In this case, different fluctuation pattern commands are set because the fluctuation times are different.

When the process of step S362, step S380, or step S382 ends, the main control program selects the variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), the big hit variation selection information type table is set as the search data, and the variation that is the search result of the variation information number search process of step S358 is set as the selection value. A pattern classification value for pattern distribution is set. In addition, when the result of the special lottery is off and the reach occurs (step S382), the reach variation selection information state table is set as the search data, and the state flag is set as the selection value. Furthermore, when the result of the special lottery is out and no reach occurs (step S380), the deviation variation selection information holding table is set as the search data, and the number of holding balls is set as the selection value.

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number for fluctuation pattern 1 (step S386) and executes the fluctuation information number search process (step S388). By the variation information number search process, the variation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table. Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selection data selection value from the fluctuation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

Then, the main control program acquires the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390, the variation information number search process. Is executed (step S394). After that, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

The fluctuation pattern selection data table is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data, with the fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the fluctuation pattern set value as one set of data. By performing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern is lower than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 for use in the variation is larger, the variation pattern set value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the variation pattern is selected. When the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. It is repeatedly executed while changing the random number 2 lower limit value for fluctuation patterns until it is determined to be large.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two stages by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Furthermore, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The method of lottery is not limited to two stages, and a method of lottery in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected by one variation pattern random number. In addition, since the current random number for each fluctuation pattern is composed of 1 byte, it is the same as the result determined by the random number for 2 bytes in total by determining by the two random numbers. When the variation pattern is selected by one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be configured by 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type determination processing]
Next, details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation type determination process in this embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control program first searches the fluctuation type judgment data table for the fluctuation type judgment data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Then, the variation pattern setting value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and variation information number search processing is executed (step S404).

In the variation type determination data table, different variation type determination data is set according to the gaming state, and the variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the process of step S400. The fluctuation type determination data is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data, with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value and the fluctuation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by performing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern selection value is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set in the variation type determination data, and the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value. When it is determined that the fluctuation type selection data selection value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is selected. When the variation pattern selection value is smaller than the variation pattern lower limit value, it is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set next, and the variation pattern lower limit value is changed until it is determined that the variation pattern selection value is larger. While being repeated. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in this variation information source address table. To be judged.

Next, the main control program searches the fluctuation type determination data address table for (the address of) the fluctuation type selection data corresponding to the fluctuation type selection data selection value acquired by the fluctuation information number search processing in step S404 (step S406). ).

Then, the main control program sets a random number for fluctuation type as a comparison value (step S408), and executes fluctuation information number search processing (step S410). At this time, the fluctuation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the fluctuation type set value is acquired by the fluctuation information number search process.

The fluctuation type selection data includes one or a plurality of sets of data, with the fluctuation type random number lower limit value and the fluctuation type set value as one set of data. By performing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation type random number is compared with the fluctuation type random number lower limit value set in the fluctuation type selection data, and the fluctuation type random number is better than the fluctuation type random number lower limit value. If is determined to be large, the fluctuation type setting value corresponding to the fluctuation type random number lower limit value is selected. If the value of the random number for fluctuation type is smaller than the lower limit value of the random number for fluctuation type, it is compared with the lower limit value of the random number for fluctuation type set next, and it is determined that the value of the random number for fluctuation type is larger. Until the variable type random number lower limit value is changed.

[9-12. Special symbol fluctuation waiting processing]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation waiting processing in the present embodiment. In the special symbol variation wait process, the variation display of the special symbol is executed in a state where it is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation is made to start the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control program first determines whether or not the variable display of special symbols is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol hold identification value (value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next time from the value stored at the head of the special symbol hold identification area is not 0. .. The main control program, if the loaded value is 0, that is, if the variable display of the special symbol is not suspended (result of step S420 is "no"), because it does not start the variable display of the special symbol, the book The process ends.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, first, since the variable display when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 (special symbol 2) is preferentially executed, the special symbol 2 is set to the starting opening identification value (step S422). ), the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set in the fluctuation setting data. Furthermore, the special symbol 2 reserve sphere number is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserve sphere area (step S426).

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the special symbol 2 holding sphere number is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). Special symbol 2 When the number of reserved balls is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set to the starting opening identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data. It is set (step S432).

The fluctuation setting data is composed of a RAM and a data table address that are referred to in order to execute the fluctuation start process in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is a different value between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. As a result, it is possible to execute the common fluctuation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in this embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The 1st byte is the lower byte of the operation hold ball number address, the 2nd and 3rd bytes are the hold ball number specifying command creation data address, the 4th and 5th bytes are the transfer source address when transferring the storage area, and the 6th and 7th bytes are the hold Storage area transfer destination address, 8th and 9th bytes are reserved 4 storage area transfer source addresses, 10th and 11th bytes are reserved 4 storage area transfer destination addresses, 12th and 13th bytes are changing setting data Address.

When the variation setting data is set, the main control program stores the starting opening identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Then, in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the special symbol total operation pending number stored in the operation pending ball number and the special symbol total operation pending number area corresponding to the starting opening identification value (step S436).

Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designating command as command data (step S438) and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). After that, the reserved ball number designating command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmitting process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The command creation table (FIG. 26(A)) for creating the number of reserved balls designation command is common to the prefetch, and the program capacity is saved by using the same table for the prefetch and the variation start. There is.

Then, the main control program executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed on the basis of a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning at the starting opening. Details of the special symbol/flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol reserved storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol holding storage area, holding storage (starting storage) including various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number extracted by starting winning is stored for each holding opening for each winning opening. When the change of the special symbol based on the hold storage is started, the hold storage in which the change is started is cleared, and the remaining hold storage is shifted. For example, when the maximum number of reservations is 4, shift the reserved memory stored in the special symbol reserved memory 2 area to the special symbol reserved memory 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol reserved memory 3 area and the special symbol reserved memory 4 area. The special symbol reserved memory 2 area and the special symbol reserved memory 3 area are shifted from the stored reserved memory. After that, the special symbol reservation storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The special symbol hold storage area shift process is set in the variable setting data, when the hold storage area is transferred, the value set in the transfer source address is stored in the transfer destination address when the hold storage area is transferred, and when the hold storage area is transferred. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address during transfer of the reserved storage area are updated to the next addresses, and the data stored in each reserved storage area is sequentially shifted.

Next, the main control program sets the changing data setting address set in the changing setting data as the setting data address, and provides the information necessary to execute the special symbol changing process executed in the next interrupt process. It is set in a predetermined storage area (step S450).

Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special figure 2 variation pattern reference command is set, and if the special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 variation pattern reference command is set (step S452-). S456).

Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as the lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation type is obtained by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the processing of step S452 or step S456. The upper byte of is calculated (step S462). The variation pattern command is created by the processing of steps S450 to S462, and the command storage processing of storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

Then, the main control program sets the symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if the special symbol 2 is the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. It is set (steps S466 to S472).

Next, the main control program sets the variable state specification command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since the generated commands are transmitted in the order in which they were generated (the order in which they were stored in the command buffer), change the order in which they were generated (the order in which they were stored in the command buffer) when changing the transmission order. do it. For example, if it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the variation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold storage for which variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol hold history of 8 (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, 4 for each) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory is started. Then, the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the beginning. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, it is sufficient to shift the area storing the seven special symbol hold history. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol variation waiting process is ended.

[9-13. Special symbol/flag setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol/flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process will be described. In the special symbol/flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol/flag setting processing in the present embodiment.

The main control program first stores a random number (random number for special symbol big hit determination) for making a big hit determination in a special lottery in a big hit determination random number buffer (random number storage area for fluctuation) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol to start the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol big hit determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2 The special symbol big hit judgment random number stored in the big hit judgment random number storage 1 area) is set. Then, the set special symbol big hit determination random number is stored (transferred) in the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

That is, the special symbol reserved storage area that is the target of fluctuation start is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol reserved storage buffer. Special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the random number storage 1 area for special jackpot determination, special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 random number value stored in the area In the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage 1 area is stored in the random number 1 buffer for variation pattern, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern The random number stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random pattern 2 buffer for the fluctuation pattern, and the random number stored in the special pattern 1 (special pattern 2) random type storage random number storage 1 area is stored in the random type buffer for the fluctuation type. Symbol 1 (special symbol 2) Random value stored in the special symbol random number storage 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

Then, the main control program sets the big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, special symbol big hit judgment processing for judging the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol/flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and sets the address value of the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) to execute the special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination process is executed at the time of pre-reading (when executed in the process of step S250 of the memory pre-reading process), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) as the big hit flag. Is set. In this way, by setting the area of the RAM to be referred to/stored before the special symbol big hit determination process in advance at the time of prefetching and at the time of variation, the "special symbol big hit determination process" is performed at the time of prefetching and at the time of variation. It is possible to share in. The procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process is as described in FIG. 27.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process of determining the type (special symbol) of the result of the special lottery (big hit) (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory prefetching process, and like the special symbol big hit determination process, it can be shared between the prefetching time and the variation time, and the processing content will be described with reference to FIG. 28. As I did. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

Next, the main control program retrieves the special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number set value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display device (7 segment, etc.) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as the display data of the special symbol display as it is, it becomes a constant display pattern, and the type of hit may be easily identified by the player in the mode displayed on the special symbol display. Therefore, the display pattern is acquired by calculation so that it does not become a constant display pattern. Also, it is possible to select the display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant, but if the number of types of symbol increases, it is necessary to hold the display pattern by that amount, and the display pattern Will increase the storage capacity for storing. Therefore, by obtaining the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress the increase in the storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

The main control program, finally, the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process, the region corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (add 1 to the address of the searched special symbol stop area) Stored in the area corresponding to the address) (step S522), and the special symbol/flag setting process ends.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing in the present embodiment.

The main control program, first, stores the special symbol operation reserved sphere number corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved sphere number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation holding ball number area (special symbol 1 operation holding ball number area or special symbol 2 operation holding ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol to start the variable display Specified, the value of the special symbol operation holding sphere number area (special symbol operation holding sphere number) is set to the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set stored value is stored in the special symbol operation reserved sphere number buffer (step S536).

Subsequently, the main control program sets the big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Furthermore, as a special symbol variation allocation information source address table that holds information for selecting a variation pattern, the special symbol variation allocation information source address table 1 is set (step S540). Then, the variation pattern selection determination process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is common to the process of step S258 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between the prefetch time and the variation time as in the special symbol big hit determination process, and will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. As I did. When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

Next, the main control program searches the special symbol variation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546). The variation time value acquired at this time becomes the reference variation time value, and the reference variation time value is saved.

Further, the main control program executes the fluctuation type determination process for acquiring the fluctuation type classification value (step S548), and sets the acquired fluctuation type classification value in the fluctuation type classification buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory prefetching process, and like the special symbol big hit determination process, it can be shared between the prefetching time and the variation time, as described in FIG. ..

Then, the main control program searches the variable time added value data for the variable time added value corresponding to the variable type classification value (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time according to the number of pseudo consecutive times. Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched for in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched for in the process of step S546 to obtain the final fluctuation time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

[9-15. Ordinary pattern and ordinary electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing in the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed in the processing of step S88 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

When the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is started, the main control program first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion (general drawing gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350, the presence/absence of a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 to store the input information in the main control built-in RAM. Input information is written in the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 (result of step S800 is "yes"), the main control program executes the gate passage process (step S802). In the gate passing process, the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main control program, when the game ball has not passed through the gate portion 2350 (result of step S800 is "no"), or when the processing at the time of passing through the gate is finished, a normal symbol/normal electric accessory The process corresponding to the ordinary symbol/electric accessory operation number is searched from the motion calling table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

In the step S810 processing, based on the normal symbol/electric accessory operation number, the normal symbol fluctuation waiting process (step S812), the normal symbol changing process (step S814), the normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), the normal symbol is deviated. The stop process (step S818), the normal symbol stop process (step S820), the normal electric accessory opening/closing process (step S822) or the normal power operation end interval process (step S824) is executed.

In the normal symbol fluctuation waiting process (step S812), based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, the process of starting the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is performed.

In the normal symbol fluctuating process (step S814), the process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is performed.

In the normal symbol winning determination process (step S816), the winning determination of the normal lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350.

In the normal symbol disengagement stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped and a process of informing that effect is performed.

In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when the regular lottery is won, the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 is stopped to notify that effect, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessory) Processing such as setting the opening/closing mode of 2106 is performed.

In the normal electric accessory opening/closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 is opened or closed so that the game ball can be received in the lower start opening 2102. The processing related to the operation of making the game ball unacceptable in the mouth 2102 is performed.

In the normal electric power operation end interval processing (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (normal electric accessory) 2106 has ended, and when it has ended, processing to notify that effect is performed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, the details of the gate passing process (step S802) in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. In the gate passing process, a command transmitted when the passage of a game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected is set, a random number for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a prefetch effect is executed. And the like.

In the gate passage process, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted, and the gate of the main control internal RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The procedure of the gate passing process will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the gate passing process is started, the main control program first obtains the value of the normal symbol operation holding ball number area as the operation holding ball number (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserving balls is 4 or more, which is the upper limit value (step S832). When the number of operation-reserving balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (result of step S832 is “yes”), the process when passing through the gate is ended.

On the other hand, when the number of operation holding balls is less than the upper limit value (result of step S832 is “no”), the main control program stores the number of operation holding balls in the normal symbol operation holding ball number buffer (step S834). Furthermore, 1 is added to the content of the normal symbol operation holding ball number area, and the normal symbol operation holding ball number is updated (step S836).

Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations (step S838). Specifically, the normal symbol random number storage area is divided in a predetermined unit from the 0th division to the 3rd division, and each division is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols, in the present embodiment, Each time the gate passes, the normal symbol random number storage area stores a hit determination random number for determining the winning or losing of the normal symbol and a hit symbol random number for determining the normal symbol. Since the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. In addition, the random number to be stored as a normal symbol is not limited to the random number. For example, when a random number for reach determination for a normal symbol like a special symbol or a random number for a variation pattern is provided, these are gated. It can be configured to store each passage.

Finally, the main control program executes the normal symbol prefetching process based on the newly stored normal symbol reservation storage (step S840). Details of the normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Ordinary pattern look-ahead processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the gate passing process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol prefetch processing in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the normal symbols based on the newly stored general symbol holding memory, and the general symbol prefetching effect is generated on the peripheral control board based on the obtained random number value. Information for determining (ordinary symbol type prefetch effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the normal symbol type prefetch command is received, it is determined whether or not the general symbol prefetch effect is executable, and processing is performed according to the determination result.

When the normal symbol pre-reading process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the pre-reading determination value to pre-reading prohibition (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set at the time of executing the process (step S852).

Here, a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination of the normal lottery is prohibited depending on the operation (open) state of the movable piece 2106 (normal electric accessory).

As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special prefetch effect mode. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a time saving state corresponding to the variation time in the ordinary lottery, the winning probability and the operation mode of the ordinary electric auditors. The probability states include a low-probability state (normal state) and a high-probability state (probability change state) in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery is higher than that of the low-probability state. Further, the time saving state includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state which is more advantageous to the player than the non time saving state. In the time saving state in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than that in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the universal drawing lottery is high, and the operation time of the ordinary electric auditors (the lower starting opening 2102 is a game. The time that a ball can enter is set to be long.

Further, in the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, a short opening in which the game ball is hard to enter the lower starting opening 2102 and the game ball is sufficiently in the lower starting opening 2102. There are two types of operation mode of long open that can enter. Further, the short open state and the long open state may be different in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the player to enter the starting opening, but in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which it is easy to enter the starting opening like the long opening. Further, the long opening may be a different opening mode between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and may be an opening mode in which the proportion of winning in the starting opening is further increased in the time saving state as compared with the non time saving state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102, so that the universal figure prefetching effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

On the other hand, the prefetch effect may be executed even when the short circuit is opened. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect for the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether it is the long opening or the short opening, and the expectation of the look-ahead effect can be further amplified. Also, by making the look-ahead effect different between the short opening and the long opening, or by making a part thereof different, it becomes possible for the player to identify which opening pattern is to be performed, and to perform a firing operation corresponding to the opening pattern. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, regarding the look-ahead effect, a gose effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. In the gasse effect, the look-ahead effect is executed, but in the end, the effect does not succeed (fails), and as a result, the player is informed that the normal electric accessory is not released. May be. Although the gaze effect will be disappointing for the player as a result, if the gaze effect is not provided, the opening operation is always performed when the look-ahead effect is performed, so that the player who is performing the look-ahead effect does not The purpose is to further increase expectations. Further, a pre-reading effect may be provided as a confirmed effect in which either the short opening or the long opening is always executed in the pre-reading effect. By setting the final effect to be different from the normal prefetch effect, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

In the case of a time saving state, the probability of winning the general figure lottery is high, and because the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors is long, the benefit of notifying the long opening is insufficient for the player, so the general figure prefetching effect is executed. You may not.

Further, when the special map prefetching effect is being executed, the execution of the general figure prefetching effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure prefetching effect that changes the mode of the hold display is being performed, it is permitted to execute the general figure prefetching effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure prefetch effect that changes the background display is being executed, the execution of the general figure prefetch effect is permitted if the probability state is low, and the general figure prefetch effect if the probability state is high. Regulates the execution of. This is because the special figure prefetching effect in the high probability state has a high expectation for winning the special lottery, and therefore the effect of the general figure prefetching effect may be reduced. However, by executing the universal figure prefetching effect, the player can encourage the continuation of the firing without stopping the firing of the game ball while the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, so It may be executed. Further, the execution of the general picture prefetching effect may be restricted according to the game state, and for example, in the case of the big hit game state, the execution of the general figure prefetching effect may be restricted.

Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set (result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the process of step S868 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when it is not in the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “no”), the contents of the hit-determining random number storage area to be pre-read are set to the pre-reading target in order to perform the pre-reading determination. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area of any of the partitions 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal symbol random number buffer. The normal symbol random number buffer is configured corresponding to the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In this embodiment, a 2-byte area for a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are used. Explaining the case where the number of reserved balls is 2 specifically, the random number for hit determination and the random number for hit symbol stored in section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively in the random number buffer for hit determination and the random number buffer for hit symbol. Is stored. In this way, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, and the "normal symbol hit determination process" is executed for the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, so that the hit at the time of prefetching It is possible to perform the determination and the hit determination at the start of fluctuation by the common processing.

Then, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference/setting destination and executing the "ordinary symbol hit determination process", the hit result, hit symbol, and the number of holdings are respectively hit flag buffer, ordinary symbol type area buffer , Normally will be set/referenced in the symbol operation holding ball number buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for making a hit determination of a normal symbol (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

The main control program clears the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, sets the normal symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type prefetch command creation data. A normal symbol pre-reading command (corresponding to the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the prefetch determination value is reset to prefetch permission (step S866).

After the processing of step S866 is completed, or in the prefetch determination prohibition period (result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation holding ball count command creation data 1 as command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination value is pre-reading prohibited (step S870), and if the pre-reading determination value is not pre-reading prohibited (result of step S870 is "no"), that is, if the pre-reading determination value is pre-reading permitted. , The normal symbol operation holding ball number command creation data 2 is reset as command data (step S872). In this way, as for the normal symbol operation holding ball number command, different commands are created when pre-reading is permitted and when pre-reading is prohibited, and, for example, different modes are set depending on whether pre-reading is permitted or prohibited. Finally, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation holding ball number command when pre-reading is permitted or pre-reading is prohibited based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872 and sets it in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Ordinary symbol hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Furthermore, the lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data table based on whether or not the time saving game state is set, and the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data is set (step S902). In addition, the normal pattern has a high probability during the time saving, and the number of hit values during the time saving is greater than the number of hit values during the non-time saving, so the lower limit value becomes smaller during the time saving. (The total number of winning values increases). Further, the main control program tentatively sets the normal symbol winning determination value to the normal symbol winning determination value as a default value (step S904).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the process of step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in the process of step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is "yes"), since it was not won in the general drawing lottery, the normal symbol winning judgment value (normal) which is provisionally set in the hit flag storage area (No symbol winning) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of deviation, the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area are each set to a deviation value "0" (normal symbol is not won).

On the other hand, if the comparison value is greater than or equal to the hit determination lower limit value (result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S908). If the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is determined that there is a deviation as in the case of not winning the general drawing lottery, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area Each is set to a deviation value of "0". Note that, as in the case of the special figure, if the hit judgment random number is originally equal to or more than the hit judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, the hit judgment random number has an upper limit value. In order to cope with a malfunction in which the exceeded value is set, it is also compared with the upper limit value.

When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is “no”), the main control program determines that the general symbol lottery is won, and the normal symbol winning determination value is the normal symbol winning (“ 1") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (ordinary symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

Then, the main control program sets the normal symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Further, as a comparison value, a random number for winning symbol is set (step S916), and the variation information number search process is executed (step S918). By the variable information number search process, the normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the normal symbol type storing area (step S920).

As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, by setting different areas in advance in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area at the time of pre-reading and at the time of change, it is possible to share the processing at the time of pre-reading and at the time of change. Specifically, when the variation of the normal symbol starts, the hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of prefetching, the hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to make the processing common to the normal lottery at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation.

The main processing relating to the special lottery and the ordinary lottery executed in the main control board 4100 has been described above. The program for executing the game control in this embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program in this embodiment. In FIG. 41, a part of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing and the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing are extracted and shown.

In the control program in the gaming machine of this embodiment, each function is divided into modules. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is a special symbol and special mouthpiece control process at the time of a winning opening winning process. It is configured not only to be used in a special symbol variation waiting process, but also to be used in a normal symbol pre-reading process of a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process. With such a configuration, regardless of the type of command, it is possible to use common modules, buffers, etc. when creating a command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

Further, a process (variable information number retrieval process) for retrieving data (variable information number) from a predetermined table can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the structure of the table to be searched and specifying the search range and search parameters. By making the modules common in this way, it is possible to improve the program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

Further, the command buffer setting process and the variable information number search process are common modules with relatively few procedures, but in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, processing such as special symbol big hit determination is pre-read ( It is common at the time of starting winning) and the start of fluctuation.

More specifically, as described above, at the time of prefetching (memory prefetching process) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation waiting process), a special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 27), a special symbol determination process (FIG. 28), The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. In these processes, the value stored in the specified address is referred to, and by specifying the reference address before executing the process, the values are stored in different areas at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation. It becomes possible to execute processing based on the value. Further, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be designated. For example, if it is applied to a process that refers to a different table depending on the game state, it can be a common process regardless of the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the common symbol hit determination process for making a hit determination in the ordinary lottery is also common in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, the hit flag indicating the result of the universal symbol lottery is acquired from the hit flag storage area, and the process is performed. However, when the normal symbol prefetch determination process is executed, refer to the address of the hit flag buffer. Although it is set as an address, the address of the hit flag area is set as a reference address when normally executed from the symbol variation waiting process.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to share the above-described modules that perform a relatively large amount of processing in common and improve the program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 44 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 45 is a flowchart, and FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral controller 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb thereof. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents When they match, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When the hot backup is performed by copying back the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), while the compared contents do not match (that is, , (When they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, for cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is also compared with the effect backup information (SRAM) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

Further, in this peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when the power supply unit starts the supply of power (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a as an initial value of a predetermined contact determination threshold value (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact point” when the power supply unit starts supplying power). (Also referred to as “judgment threshold”).

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and the time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set to the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current brightness adjustment information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set, is included.

In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is used. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, first, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is activated The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to perform serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game data is stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later. Has become.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is set. It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform serial transmission of serial I/O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created in the 4150cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a trigger (in this embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the data is transferred to and written in the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written in this. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation (rotation direction of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Whether or not the portion 405 is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation portion 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation portion 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the display data creation processing to be described later is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from channels CH1 and CH2. The data is output to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a processing time delay, but although so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output processing of step S1012, and Speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization between the effect provided by the speakers and the effects provided by the speakers provided on the door frame 5 for various effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data that is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to stereo music such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects being stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, there are also notification sounds and notification sounds. It will be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the emission data from the first emission data to the emission data of various LEDs is determined. The pointer is updated in order to indicate whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the first sound command data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the production control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception unit) described later (command analysis unit). ). That is, the production control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of reserved normal symbols (0-4) A normal symbol storage command for identifying, a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start pending changes, and a game ball accepted to the special winning opening 2103 With the special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not there is (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in effect. Also, in this effect control program, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door frame opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into the special figure 1 tuning effect related commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect related commands, the jackpot related commands, and power-on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be related to the general figure synchronization effect, various commands to be related to the normal electric role effect, various commands to be displayed for the notification shown in FIG. 16, and the door frame opening command described above. , Door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error cancel command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command), etc. There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16, various abnormalities are caused in the warning process. Around the peripheral control unit 4150, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for executing the notification, It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of high priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. As a result, it is possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality is resolved. You can

Further, in the warning process, after the predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the production control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, a game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 (rendering device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (rendering device), using a lamp (rendering device) to visually warn the outside, or with a pair of side speakers (rendering device) to externally hear To warn (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite the game state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs the RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1025, the effect control program performs effect control processing (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, the demo screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not executed, or when the command for special figure tuning effect is received, the progress of special figure tuning effect is controlled. Also, a big hit game effect and the like are executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program sets the execution start time of the special figure pre-reading effect. Details of the special figure prefetching effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs the universal figure prefetching effect control process (step S1028). In the universal figure prefetching effect control process, the production control program controls the setting and the progress at the time of starting the execution of the universal figure prefetching effect. Details of the universal figure prefetching effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, the light emission indicated by the pointer. Based on the data, the peripheral control unit 4150 outputs game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 4. Of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are created and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided are controlled by a peripheral control ROM 4150b or a peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. It is created by extracting it from the data copy area 4150ce, and is set in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in time series in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is the data forming the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and the extracted at least one character data. Sprite data is created from the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and is generated in the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

By the way, in the conventional pachinko game machine, as the game progresses, by displaying a video in which a number of material images are superimposed on the background image in each frame, it is trying to make the player's interest less exhaustive. Although it is required to perform display control so that more material images are included in each frame in order to display more diverse images, it seems that the inclusion of many material images in each frame is It seems to be a heavy burden to control.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of the frame including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program causes each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame to be displayed. While managing correspondence information in which correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined, the correspondence information is referred to when a predetermined frame of each frame is displayed. Of at least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame and specify the drawing data without including other material images other than the predetermined material image in the sound source built-in VDP4160a. It is generated and stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means). The details will be described below.

First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) out of a large number of background image data used to display a large number of background images forming each frame is At least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) on a background image based on this specific background image data is originally arranged at a position (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), As represented by a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter, referred to as “concealed state”), the following management is performed.

First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence association table (correspondence information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence association table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) are displayed. Preliminary correspondence information is managed together with a correspondence release command (concealment cancellation command) for canceling the visual protection state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence association table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame are used as part of the correspondence information. The value is managed.

In the correspondence association table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be displayed in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and Correspondence with a confidentiality cancellation command for canceling the visual confidentiality state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from the sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). The production control program, when trying to display a predetermined frame in accordance with the result of the predetermined production lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, controls the peripheral control MPU4150a so that the correspondence relation of the correspondence relation table is obtained. By referring to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and expressed is specified (material image specifying means).

Furthermore, the production control program specifies the anonymity cancellation command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence association table when the desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, The specified security release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (security release instruction means). This concealment cancellation command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as a "desired sprite number") that can identify a desired sprite whose confidential state should be released in the predetermined frame. With the output of such a confidentiality cancellation command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated from what was initially off to on. This name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be displayed in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes the drawing process.

When the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is operated as follows. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has not received the confidentiality cancellation command, a display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table remains in the secret state is displayed. The drawing data for this is generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the above-mentioned concealment cancellation command, the VDP 4160a confirms that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included therein is updated to ON. As a trigger, the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation association table is referred to, and the desired sprite corresponding to the confidentiality cancellation command is specified. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data in the frame buffer for canceling the hidden state of the specified desired sprite and for making the display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized. Thereby, the effect control program can display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

In this way, the effect control program does not need to finely manage which sprite group can be displayed in each frame when displaying a frame group of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, by controlling whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the concealment cancellation command, which is much simpler than the conventional display control, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source draws a frame representing each desired sprite or a desired one. It is possible to draw a frame that does not represent the sprite of. As a result, it is possible to simplify the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites and reduce the processing load.

Moreover, since the correspondence relation linking table described above is used to manage the correspondence relation by linking the sprite group including the desired sprite with the production control program (the concealment cancellation command group issued by the). , The creation work of the sprite data and the design work of the effect control program can be made independent and completely separated, and the design work related to the display control can be simplified.

By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and thereafter, the device operates at the sensitivity. Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance, depending on the game environment thereafter.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a to display the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). A function that causes the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the above-described effect command (effect execution instruction) for executing a display operation in a mode of prompting contact with the operation surface. A threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). That is, the effect control program displays a screen (to the operation surface of the contact-type input means) on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as an effect command (effect execution command) to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger. The command for executing the display operation of (contact mode) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact reminder command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the effect control program (the display control program under the control of the command) touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) with a finger based on the command. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is caused to display a screen in a mode prompting for touch.

Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detection means) that detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as the detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including this initial position is acquired. It should be noted that this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range).

In this touch panel processing, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concern, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the effect command (effect execution command) described above, and then stored in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold value is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

Specifically, the effect control program, as the above-mentioned predetermined timing, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses from the main control MPU 4100a, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 15). ) Is received as a trigger for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) from the last receipt, or when the variation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (Fig. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last reception of (15)), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example outside thereof, the touch panel 246 is touched. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, this effect control program is triggered by the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a receiving a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and based on this threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold for use. Specifically, when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time the contact state is detected as described above, and When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold value, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold value, Judge that the contact surface is in contact.

Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

With the above configuration, the touch panel controller 481 changes the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the determined contact determination threshold value is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. It becomes (calibration). Therefore, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold value setting command by removing the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the touch panel 246 always operates without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be made an appropriate operation mode.

As the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as described above, for example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command that is output when the variable display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, it is less likely that the player has touched the operation surface of the touch panel 246 because a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command was received and the player has stopped playing the game. Timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity should be performed as little as possible during the variation display of the special symbol that may perform the effect using the touch panel 246, and the variation display is ended. There is.

In addition, as the timing for outputting the threshold value setting command, in addition, the production control program is a general control synchronization production end time command (see FIG. 15) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time elapses from the main control MPU 4100a. It may be a timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after receiving the data.

On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the electrostatic capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 which can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity, but it is necessary even after the power is turned on. Since the sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing according to this, it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. Hard to do.

Following step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound designated by the pointer is included in the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, the audio data is audio data that is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 can be set from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 are Although the effect sound such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the speaker provided becomes small, the volume is high when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or the player is cheating (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is set). The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to increase the volume of the sound generated by playing the sound and to add the music and the sound effect to the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as a more powerful one. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which are included in the target Bank 0 (1fr), Also, the performance information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used as performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored contents are all copied in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request cause of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1fr). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous by Bank4 (in the second area 4150cc). 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target for every one frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is provided in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, using the effect information (SRAM) stored in the stored Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 4150dc. From the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to specify that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous in Bank4 (second) of backup second area 4150dc. All are sequentially copied from the top address of the SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady process starts by the production control program first setting the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to 1 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing. Once set, it will be complete. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 12, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed in response to this will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control is executed. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) shown in FIG. The fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the processing flag SP-FLG is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, the peripheral control unit V blank indicating that the peripheral control unit steady process is completed by setting the value 0 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 of the process at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady process) By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is not processed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[10-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. .. When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and as shown in FIG. Is smaller than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the effect control program is the same as this routine. To finish. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program sets the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 according to the drive data designated by the pointer. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the production control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to perform serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port. When serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is started, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is first set. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is generated by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and at the same time, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf is used to drive the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a trigger (in this embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 4150ad, and the peripheral I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is transferred to and written in the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is configured. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in series, the drive to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on the drive data designated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral shown in FIG. It is set in the transmission data storage area 4150cag on the motor drive board side of the control RAM 4150c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is stored). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the dial operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence/absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the effect control program performs the drawing state acquisition process (S1110), then the backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 is generated, that is, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area, which are included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms), are included. 4150cah and the effect information (1ms) that is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is used as effect backup information (1ms) in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb. The control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are copied to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and then Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are consecutively transferred to Bank4 (second) of backup second area 4150cc. (1 ms), starting from the first address, all are copied in order.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 illustrated in FIG. 12 starts main transmission serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and the mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is within a period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is followed by the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data When the byte sum value is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. Of the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main-circulation serial data are shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. The "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU4150a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Next, the effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern table in this embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table for managing the pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronization effect includes effects such that the peripheral control board 4140 causes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to variably display a decorative pattern or displays a character, corresponding to the variable display game. Further, effects such as operating a movable accessory, illuminating a light-emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker may be included during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The production corresponding to the variation pattern of the present embodiment includes story reach, pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous), and the like. In addition, a variation pattern over a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

Story reach is an effect in which a decorative design is in a reach mode, and a specific effect according to the degree of expectation (possibly a big hit) of the variable display game being executed is executed one or more times. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of executions of the specific effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. The specific effect may be executed before the reach is generated, or may be executed only after the reach is generated. In addition, the production mode of the specific production includes, for example, screen display (cut-in) such as appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, voice output), movement of a movable accessory, light emission of a lamp, and the like. .. Further, for the same type of effect, a plurality of different effect modes according to the degree of expectation may be defined.

The pseudo continuous variation is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative design (identification design) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and re-performed. The temporary stop and the re-change are repeated one or more times. In this embodiment, the larger the number of stops, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, an effect such as a character appearing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or the effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the type of the reach in the final variation may be defined together.

The variation pattern is a special figure 1 variation pattern command or a special figure 2 variation pattern command (hereinafter referred to as a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The value (effect pattern) set in the mode of "special figure variation pattern command", and special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special symbol 1 symbol type command and special symbol 2 symbol) It is selected based on the value (result of the variable display game) set in the mode of “special symbol design type command” together with the type command. Further, one variation pattern may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1(2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1(2) symbol type command, or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond. When a plurality of variation patterns correspond, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a game state.

The fluctuation pattern table includes items such as fluctuation pattern name, winning information, fluctuation time, effect insertion number (scenario count), effect selection pattern, and re-lottery. The “variation pattern name” is a name for identifying the variation pattern. "Winning information" is the result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to the value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. It should be noted that a gaming state (eg, “normal state”, “probability change state”, “time saving state”) may be used instead of the “winning prize information”.

"Variation time" corresponds to the variation time (variation display game execution time) during which the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the varying time may be changed according to the number of starting memories. For example, when the number of starting memories is large (for example, the number of starting memories is 3 or more), the variation time may be shortened. The variation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is the same. The same is true even when the variation time is shortened.

The "number of effect insertions" is the number of times a particular effect is executed during variable display in story reach, or the number of times a special symbol is temporarily stopped (irrespective of whether or not the effect is executed during temporary stop) in pseudo continuous fluctuation. Is. The “production selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a specific production candidate to be executed in story reach, or selecting an production to be executed at the time of temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, as the highly reliable variation pattern is selected, an effect selection pattern is set in which the highly reliable specific effect is more likely to be selected. A specific example of the "production selection pattern" will be described later with reference to FIG.

The “re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute the process of re-lottering the stopped special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is finished. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (the process of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis processing of this embodiment.

In the received command analysis process, the production control program is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) to first determine whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. It is determined (step S1401).

When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 generates peripheral control command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 45), and in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing, the main control board 4100. The various commands from are stored in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. It should be noted that the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer is provided with a plurality of areas, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order of reception.

When a command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends the command in the earliest order of reception from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring. The data is read from the buffer (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (special figure 1 variation pattern command or special figure 2 variation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). When it is determined that the command is the special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 and the variation is performed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process ends.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read command is not the special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is "No"), the read command is the special figure design type command (special figure 1 design type command or special feature It is determined whether or not the symbol type command in FIG. 2, the winning information command indicating “off”, “specific big hit”, and “non-specific big hit” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). When it is determined that the command is the special symbol design type command (result of step S1405 is “Yes”), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the reception command is received. The analysis process ends.

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not the special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a commands the read command to instruct the special symbol prefetch effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether or not it is the number designation command or the special symbol 2 hold number designation command (prefetching), FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure prefetching effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at a timing when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number) increases. As will be described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing special figure pre-reading effect, a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag indicating execution of special figure pre-reading effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) reservation number designation command of "preread". In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reservation number designation command of "no prefetch", the determination is "No". In addition, as the special symbol prefetching effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command for instructing a special symbol prefetching effect other than the special symbol 1(2) reservation number designation command (symbol type prefetching, variation pattern prefetching, variation type prefetching) Including all of the above, the determination of “Yes” may be made when all the commands for instructing the special figure prefetching are received.

Further, when the read effect command is the special figure prefetching effect command (result of step S1407 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S1408), and receives command analysis processing. To finish. When the special map prereading effect execution flag is set, whether or not to execute the special map prereading effect is determined in the special figure prereading effect control process (step S1027 of FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process, and the special figure prereading effect is determined. Make the necessary settings to execute the performance. The main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special drawing prefetching effect.

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not the special figure prefetch effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the general command prefetch effect command (normal symbol type prefetch command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The normal figure prefetching effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at a timing when the normal symbol operation holding ball number increases. In addition, the general figure prefetching effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the general figure lottery. When the general figure prefetching effect command is received, the general figure type prefetching effect execution flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type prefetching effect (general figure prefetching effect) is set. When the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, whether or not to execute the universal figure prefetching effect is determined in the universal figure prefetching effect control process (step S1028 of FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process, and the universal figure prefetching effect is determined. Make the necessary settings to execute the performance. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the universal figure prefetching effect. Further, in the case of a model which does not execute the general picture prefetching effect, the received command is discarded.

On the other hand, when the read effect command is not the universal figure prefetching effect command (result of step S1409 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step (S1411), the received command analysis process ends.

The command received from the main control board 4100 is, for example, as described in FIGS. 15 and 16, a special figure synchronization effect ending command (special figure 1 synchronization effect ending command or Special figure 2 synchronization effect end command), and when the result of the variation display game is a big hit, a variation state specification command that specifies the game state (probably changed state, time saving state, normal game state) after the big hit game ends included. When the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the synchronization effect end flag is set. Further, depending on the result of the variable display game, a big hit opening command for instructing the execution of the effect at the start of the big hit game and a big hit ending command for instructing the effect at the end of the big hit game are included.

Further, when a game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, a starting port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to notify that the gaming ball has won in the starting port. An instruction to start (for example, voice output) is given. Further, when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls changes due to the start of the prize winning of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 and the variation display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display device 1185, the special symbol 1 memory command is mainly controlled. It is received from the board 4100. Similarly, when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls is changed by the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the lower starting opening 2102 and the winning of the game ball and the lower special symbol display device 1186, the special symbol 2 memory command is mainly used. It is received from the control board 4100.

Further, the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number), based on the process of step S1107 It is set to update the display corresponding to the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number) in the device 1900.

Further, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the effect-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) is performed. Execute the process.

Further, in addition to the command described above, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, the power cut command is transmitted. Note that the main control board 4100 is supplied with power from the capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 for a predetermined time even when the power supply from the outside such as pachinko island equipment is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held and a command such as a power cut command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 and the like. When the power supply from the outside is restarted, the power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes processing according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 of FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

The production control process, based on the value of the process selection flag showing the progress of the game, one of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and the big hit display process (step S1700) Is selectively processed.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, when the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the received command analysis process. Then, the process for starting the special figure synchronization effect including the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. For example, based on the variation pattern and winning information of the variation display game, determine the content of the effect (decorative design stop pattern, reach effect type, determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect, notice effect mode, presence or absence of extension effect, etc.), Settings etc. are made according to the decided effect contents. In addition, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is executed when the special figure synchronization effect is not executed. Details of the decorative symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the decorative symbol variation process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the variable display game is performed on condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variable display of the decorative symbol) is started. Controls the special figure synchronization effect executed in synchronization. Further, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, processing for ending the special figure synchronization effect and stopping it is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation process, effect control from the start to the end of the special figure synchronization effect is performed. Details of the decorative symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, in order to end the special figure synchronization effect accompanied by the variable display of the decorative symbol, the effect control program definitely stops the decorative symbol based on the result of the variable display game. Finally, the effect control program sets the process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, the process selection flag is set to [2] when the result of the variable display game is “big hit”, and the process selection flag is set to [0] when the result of the variable display game is “out”. Set.

In order to continue the special figure synchronization effect until the special figure synchronization effect end condition is satisfied, the effect control program switches, for example, the scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the character. Perform productions such as making them appear. Further, the effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently, and for example, the look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time or the like is executed.

In the big hit display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48) and a big hit. On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, the display showing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the special winning opening 2003 is opened, and the display during the big hit game state (for example, round display, etc.) ) Control is performed. Further, at the end of the processing, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decorative pattern change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the process waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) on the main control board 4100 side. .. Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control relating to the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

More specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is “No”), the effect control program is executing a demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is determined whether or not (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the last display effect such as the symbol variation was completed ( Step S1512). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), the demonstration effect display flag for starting the demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set (step S1513).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. If the condition is satisfied (result of step S1501 is “Yes”) or a predetermined time has elapsed (result of step S1512 is “Yes”), the process waits.

Further, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues to execute the demonstration effect as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure fluctuation pattern command and special figure design type command, effect setting processing for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the production control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol variation start process is executed only once at the start of execution of the special figure synchronization effect.

[10-9. Production setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting effect contents at the start of special figure synchronization effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag and parameter are set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment.

First, the effect control program specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, the variation based on the current game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short-time state, a normal game state, or the like, which may be a production mode associated only with the production mode) You may make it select a pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47 may be provided with a game state item, and a variation pattern having a different presentation mode may be defined for each game state.

Then, the effect control program sets the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the identified variation pattern is story reach (step S1521). If it is the story reach (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the story reach setting process for setting the data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not the story reach (result of step S1521 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not the variation pattern is pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). If it is the pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “Yes”), the pseudo continuous variation setting process for setting the data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous variation is executed (step S1550).

On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing an effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, the continuous prefetching effect setting process for executing the continuous prefetching effect capable of setting the effect content independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous pre-reading effect setting process, when it is determined that the continuous pre-reading effect is executed in the special figure pre-reading effect control process of step S1027 of FIG. 42, the progress of the continuous pre-reading effect is controlled based on the determined effect contents. To do. Details of the continuous prefetching effect setting process will be described later.

Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music and voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing of receiving the special figure synchronization effect end command from the main control board 4100.

Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music and voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. In addition, the effect pattern includes a notice mode corresponding to the variation pattern. For example, in order to suggest the result of variable display, a specific character is made to appear, or the background color is set to a color different from usual. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing of receiving the special figure synchronization effect end command from the main control board 4100.

When the effect setting process ends, the information necessary to execute the special figure synchronization effect is set. Then, the lamp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the lamp data creation process (step S1028), and the display data of the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42) are performed. By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), etc., the special figure synchronization effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

[10-10. Decorative pattern change processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process in this embodiment.

The decorative symbol variation process is executed when the decorative symbol variation start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. Then, in the decorative symbol variation process, the special symbol synchronization effect that is executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variable display of the decorative symbol) is started.

When the decorative symbol changing process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for ending the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, the ending condition of the special symbol synchronizing effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the ending condition of the special figure tuning effect, for example, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when a special figure tuning effect ending command (symbol fixing command) is received from the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronization effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both the time elapsed from the reception of the special figure synchronization effect end command and the start of the special figure synchronization effect may be used as the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect. For example, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Even if it is not necessary, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so that the variable display is forcibly ended and the decorative design is fixedly stopped.

When the ending condition of special figure synchronization effect is satisfied (result of step S1601 is “Yes”), the effect control program stops the variable display (decision stop) with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command ( Step S1602). Then, the processing selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to "0" when the result of the variable display game is "out", and the process selection flag is set to "2" when the result is "big hit". If there is a "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

On the other hand, the effect control program, if the ending condition of the special figure synchronization effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, in the case of continuing the variable display of the decorative pattern, first, of the variation pattern It is determined whether the type is story reach (step S1604). When the type of the variation pattern is story reach (result of step S1604 is “Y”), story reach control processing for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, all the scenario effects executed in the story reach are selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process), but when each scenario is selected immediately before the execution of the scenario effects, the story reach control process is performed. Selected in. When the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation status of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and the control according to the operation status is executed. Good.

When the type of the variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the type of the variation pattern is pseudo continuous variation (step S1605). When the type of fluctuation pattern is pseudo continuous fluctuation (result of step S1604 is “Yes”), pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing for controlling the progress of pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process will be described later.

Furthermore, when the type of the variation pattern is not the pseudo continuous variation (result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes control processing of special figure synchronization effect corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching the scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. Further, the effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently, and for example, the look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time or the like may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, this process ends.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal ) Is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. When the power failure notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power failure notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process which is the main routine is started and the power outage notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the power saving process is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stable operation is secured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is the time when the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. ..

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

A high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa causes the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to request the factor. The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0(1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2(1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and are stored in Bank0(1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously written from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all are sequentially copied from the top address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to this are all copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa transfers the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the request command area of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. The copy is designated, and the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are predetermined. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (a peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input is continuously determined. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 42 is restarted.

In this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU4150a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled in the endless loop due to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage advance signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled in the infinite loop in S1312 and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Story reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the special control synchronizing effect is executed by the peripheral control circuit board 4140 in synchronization with the variable display (variable display game) of the special symbol on the main control circuit board 4100. When story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, in the special figure entrainment effect, an effect (specific effect) that indicates the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed (inserted) once or multiple times. To be done.

In addition, in the production related to story reach, the decorative pattern is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific production may be before the reach production or after the reach production. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific effect in the story reach is executed after the reach is generated. Below, the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting processing]
First, the production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach setting process in this embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed by the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, the process relating to the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described, and for the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as other reach effects, another variation pattern is selected. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as in the case where it is performed, the description will be omitted.

When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number and effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probability change state, normal state) of the variable display game or the operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric auditors. Furthermore, an initial value (“0”) is set to the number of selected effects indicating the number (counter) of the specific effects set in this processing (step S1532). Next, the scenario for the specific effect is selected by the number of inserted effects (steps S1533 to S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effects to be executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effects to be executed first are finally selected.

The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of effect insertions, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). If the number of selected effects is less than the number of inserted effects (the result of step S1533 is “No”), there is still a specific effect for which a scenario has not been selected, and therefore a process for selecting a scenario (steps S1534 to S1538). To execute.

The production control program acquires a random number value (production selection information) for selecting a specific production (step S1534). Then, based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random value acquired in the process of step S1534, the specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) (step S1535).

Here, the procedure for selecting the specific effect will be described in more detail. In the production executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, a production selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, one of the specific effects of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( (Probability) is set to be high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario with a high expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenarios 5 and 6 with relatively high expectations are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenarios 1 and 2 with relatively low expectations are selected. It is set not to be performed.

Furthermore, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 in FIG. Instead of setting such that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selected, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

Moreover, you may make it hold|maintain the production selection pattern for every game state. For example, in a high probability state in which the variable display of the special symbols has a high probability of winning, a scenario with a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the player's expectation may be further enhanced. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery table) may be selected depending on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the game state described above, the number of times of variable display based on a predetermined change pattern (for example, the number of times of SP reach execution), or a big prize in a big hit game. It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

The random number for selecting the specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range of "0" to "1000"). Therefore, after a scenario with high expectations is selected, a scenario with low expectations is selected (falls down), which may make it difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, a case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern will be described. Pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of insertion effects is 3. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario corresponding to the specific effect executed first is "scenario 2", the scenario executed next is "scenario 3", and the scenario executed last is "scenario 1". In this case, the specific effect executed after the specific effect (“scenario 3”) executed the second time becomes “scenario 1” having a relatively low degree of expectation. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the expected degree of the variable display game being executed corresponds to "scenario 1" or "scenario 3", and the reliability of the story reach as the notice production is impaired. There is a risk that

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, it is possible to prevent the fall described above from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in this embodiment in chronological order.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects to be executed last are sequentially selected. When "story reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern (insertion effect number 3), first, the specific effect executed last (third) is executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, random number values are extracted in the range of 0 to 1000 (regular range) (FIG. 55(A)). When the random number value extracted at this time is "550", "scenario 3" is selected by referring to the effect selection pattern selection table in FIG. Then, the effect control program stores identification information of the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1536). Information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

Then, the effect control program sets the range (upper limit value) of the random numbers extracted to select the second specific effect to be executed (step S1538). As described above, since "scenario 3" is selected in the final specific effect to be executed, if "scenario 4" is selected in the second specific effect to be executed, a fall occurs. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the random number generation range is not a range from the prescribed 0 to 1000, but only the “scenario 1” to “scenario 3” are selected so that the random number generation range is selected. Is set in the range of 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value “600” is the upper limit value for which “scenario 3” is selected, and setting the upper limit value to “600” prevents “scenario 4” from being selected. In FIG. 55(B), the range of the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range of the broken line (the range from “600” to “1000”) is the random number extraction failure. It is within the possible range.

Here, when "150" is extracted as the random number value for selecting the specific effect to be executed second, "scenario 2" is selected as the scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the random number values to be extracted to "200" so that "scenario 1" or "scenario 2" in which the particular effect that is executed first does not fall is selected. Set. After that, for example, when “85” is extracted as the random number value, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55(C)).

Then, in the process of step S1538, the value of the number of selected effects becomes 3, and the value of the number of selected effects matches the value of the number of inserted effects, so the result of the process of step S1533 becomes “Yes”, and the effect control program specifies The production selection ends. Finally, the range (upper limit value) of the changed random numbers is set to the specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is ended.

In the procedure of the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers is set at the start of variation (production control process→decorative pattern variation start process→production setting process→story reach setting process), but at another timing. You may set the range of random numbers.

For example, all the scenarios for the specific effects may be selected at the timing when the specific effects are first executed (when the execution of the specific effects is started). In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the story reach setting process described above may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command or a command related to the prefetching effect transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of variation to the execution of the specific effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the effect variation. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is performed after the reach is generated, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

In addition, at the timing of selecting a specific effect, a random number value corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when the random number is extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), and “550” (scenario). The specific effect may be executed in the order of 3).

Further, a random number may be randomly selected each time the specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of the specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random number value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, the lower limit value of the random number is set after selecting the scenario for the specific effect. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, since the effect with higher expectation is set to be executed as the random number is larger, when the specific effects to be executed are selected in the execution order, the upper limit value is set. No, reset the lower limit. Specifically, when scenario 2 is first selected, the lower limit value is set to “100” so that no fall occurs when the next specific effect is selected, and a random number value in the range of “100” to “1000”. To generate. By controlling in this way, story reach can be executed as in the case of selecting a specific effect at the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that when the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and is used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronization effect) ends. It should be noted that a more specific procedure will be described in the control in the pseudo continuous effect described later.

Further, both the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it becomes possible to control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”, it is possible to select only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2”. Also, by setting the lower limit value to “101” and the upper limit value to “200”, it is possible to ensure that “scenario 2” is selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed in the case where all the specific effects are selected at the time of starting the fluctuation. Further, the effect selection pattern table may be provided with items such as setting only the upper limit value (or the lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and the lower limit value so that the setting can be made for each effect selection pattern.

If the lower limit value is not "0", a random number value from "0" to "lower limit value-upper limit value" may be generated and the lower limit value may be added to the extracted random number value. For example, when the lower limit value is "101" and the upper limit value is "200", a random number from "0" to "99 (=lower limit value-upper limit value)" is generated and the lower limit value "101" is added. The result may be extracted as a random number.

[11-2. Performance example]
By the above processing, it is possible to select the specific effect executed in the story reach so that the fall does not occur. Next, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, after the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative pattern 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and an area 1912 is formed above the starting memory display portion 1911. In the area 1912, the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed is displayed.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario (serif) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, the expectation level of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is high. Specifically, in scenario 1, a line indicating that the degree of expectation is low (“useless!!”) is displayed, and the line is set so that the expectation gradually increases. In scenario 5, a line suggesting a big hit (“I wonder?”) is set, and in a scenario 6, a line suggesting that the big hit is confirmed (“big hit !!!”) is set. The scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit is confirmed.

Next, the screen transition of story reach will be described. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. Further, since the story reach is selected as the variation pattern, the reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

After that, at the timing of executing the first specific effect, the specific effect in which the dialogue (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). After that, at the timing of executing the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), scenario 3 having a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode.

Here, when the generation range of the random numbers is not adjusted, in the finally-executed special effect, as shown in the screen (E-1), the special effect having a lower expectation than the previously-executed special effect is displayed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the falling, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the previously executed specific effect is always executed (screen (E-2)). In addition, in the procedure of this embodiment, since the scenarios are selected in order from the specific effect to be executed last, when the scenario 1 is selected last, the scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same degree of expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed once or more in the special figure synchronization effect, and selected by the lottery at a predetermined timing. The effect based on the created scenario is executed. In the scenario-based effect, an effect (specific effect) that indicates the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed is executed, as in the story mode described above.

The temporary stop of the decorative design is a state in which the variation of the decorative design is recognized by the player as if it stopped, but the variation actually continues. For example, when the decorative symbols stop in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops at the end is in a state of slightly moving up and down, and re-fluctuation is started from this state.

Further, for the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The variable display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be changed again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped with the same decorative symbol, and the result mode may be different only by the difference in the fourth symbol. With such a configuration, by performing a winning game by making a part of the big hit result mode and the small hit result mode similar to each other, the gaming state after the winning game is finished (such as the winning probability of the variable display game) Can be made difficult to recognize by the player, and variations in production can be increased.

In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios executed at the start of the change are determined, but in the pseudo continuous change in the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected by lottery at the timing of executing the specific effect (scenario effect). .. Further, in the pseudo continuous variation, if a reach occurs in the last re-variation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed without the pseudo continuous variation is executed. Alternatively, the reach effect may be executed only in the case of pseudo continuous variation. Further, in the pseudo continuous variation, the reach may not be generated at the last variation. In the following, an effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation, as described above, the effect contents are drawn just before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of fluctuation, the initial setting necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation setting process in this embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed by the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo continuous variation setting process shown in FIG. 60, the process regarding the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described, and regarding the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as the other reach effect, another variation pattern is set. Since the processing is the same as when it is selected, the description is omitted.

When the pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed, the production control program first acquires the production insertion number (temporary stop number) and the production selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and stores them in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

Further, the effect control program sets the number of effect insertions as an initial value to the remaining effect number, which is the number of remaining executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, in order to initialize the range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the scenario of the specific effect, a specified value is set (step S1553). In the present embodiment, the contents of the effect are selected at the time of executing the scenario effect, and the scenario effects to be executed first are sequentially selected. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of the random number for scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set in order to limit the selected scenarios.

As in the story mode, all scenarios may be selected by lot in the pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of variation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing]
Next, the pseudo continuous variation control process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation control process in this embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed from the start of variation display of the decorative pattern until the display stops, and controls execution of temporary stop and execution of scenario effect in pseudo continuous variation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

In the pseudo continuous variation effect of the present embodiment, the operation input reception period of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is set in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, Scenario production is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1631). The press operation unit operation acceptable flag is set when the operation input of the press operation unit 405 can be accepted to execute the scenario effect. That is, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, the process for executing the scenario effect is executed.

When the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not it is the timing at which the operation operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous variation control process ends.

When it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (result of step S1646 is “Yes”), it indicates that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is available (press operation. Settings for executing the effect (requesting the operation of the unit 405) are performed (step S1647). Furthermore, the operation accepting flag of the pressing operation unit is set (step S1648), and the pseudo continuous variation control process is ended. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the temporary stop timing of the decorative design. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired by the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42). )) is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral controller steady process.

When the pressing operation portion operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value within the set upper limit value and lower limit value (step S1633). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the effect pattern table is the same as that for story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that scenarios with low expectations are easily selected.

When a scenario is selected, the performance control program executes a scenario execution setting process for setting performance information related to image data, sound data, etc. necessary to execute a performance (specific performance) based on the selected scenario. Yes (step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting processing is the lamp data creation processing (step S1030), the display data creation processing (step S1030), and the sound data creation processing (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the lamp The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

After that, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of the random value for selecting the scenario to be executed next, based on the random value acquired in the process of step S1633, so that the effect content does not fall. It is set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower degree of expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, at least a similar scenario is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 62. If the acquired random number value is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to "301", a scenario with an expectation level equal to or higher than scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Also, by setting the lower limit value to "501" instead of "301", it is possible to set it so that it is always satisfied.

On the other hand, when the press operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the effect control program causes the press operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer to time up. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1638). When the time has not expired (result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo continuous effect control process is ended, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously accepted. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has timed out (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processing of step S1640 and thereafter is executed.

When the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, or when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is not accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period and time is up, The effect control program ends the pressing operation section operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the operation accepting flag of the pressing operation unit is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining effect number is decremented by 1 (step S1642).

Finally, the effect control program determines whether the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), the final specific effect has been executed, so the upper limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645) and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. The process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the press operation unit operation acceptable time in order to set the operation input timing for the next press operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

From the above, the specific effect is produced when the pressing operation unit is operated in a state where the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measuring timer has not expired and the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set. Controlled to be executed. In addition, the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be after the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measuring timer is up, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The copy operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Example of pseudo continuous variation]
Next, an example of the effect of pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, before the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation part suggestive effect is started from a predetermined time before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (the operation accepting state for the pressing operation part 405 is enabled), and the pressing operation part suggestive effect is provided at the timing of the temporary stop. The operation ends (operation cannot be accepted for the pressing operation unit 405). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state in which an operation can be received for the pressing operation unit 405 (press operation unit operation acceptable period), after the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the fluctuation of the identification symbol is started again. During the period, the specific effect is executed.

The specific effect is the same as the story reach, and when the specific effect is executed, the decorative pattern 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and an area 1912 is formed above the starting memory display portion 1911. In the area 1912, the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed is displayed.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the special figure synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 63(A), the left symbol and the right symbol are arranged in this order. The decorative pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the pressing operation unit operation receivable period comes, and the pressing operation unit suggesting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is executed is stopped as a middle symbol, and then the figure As shown in 63(D), the specific effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the re-variation of the decorative pattern is started, and the pressing operation part suggestive effect is started as in FIG. 63(B) (FIG. 63(F)). At this time, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (FIG. 63(G)), the re-variation is started without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63(H)). After that, when the final decorative design is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63(I)), the reach effect is executed (FIG. 63(J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63(J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed is executed even when the pseudo continuous variation is not executed. However, even if the reach executed at this time is an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous effect. Good. Further, the pressing operation part suggestive effect may be executed before the final provisional stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the re-fluctuation is started without executing the specific effect, but the specific effect is given after a predetermined time elapses. It may be executed.

[12-4. Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Further, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. 64 and 65 are diagrams for explaining the timing of controlling the pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64(A) shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation accepting period of the pressing operation unit.

First, at time t10, the game balls are won in the starting openings 2101 and 2102, and the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 (the special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186) Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command, a special figure design type command, etc. are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (start of special figure synchronization effect), the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 (press operation unit operation reception) at a timing before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. (Possible period) is started, and the pressing operation part suggestive effect is started (time t11). The pressing operation unit operation receivable period continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is completed. At this time, the scenario effect to be executed is selected by lot (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative design ends (timing to start rechanging the decorative design, time t14). The specific effect based on the created scenario is executed.

Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. Then, when the final temporary stop is completed, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the reach effect is finished, in synchronization with the end of the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, the variation of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the confirmed symbol is displayed (time t18).

Next, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. FIG. 64B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is not executed. In the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, since the lower limit value of the random number is not reset, all candidate scenarios can be selected.

Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modified example of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation accepting period of the pressing operation unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 65(C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of re-changing the decorative pattern. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect is executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect at the timing when the player operates, and it is possible to execute the effect without a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIG. 65(D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is skipped and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during a subsequent pressing operation unit operation receivable period. For, the specific effect for the skipped portion is executed.

Referring to FIG. 65(D), a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period Shows. In this case, the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped, but the skipped specific effect is also executed at the third temporary stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 65(D), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third press operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect including the skipped portion is selected. After the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the selected specific effects (scenario 3, scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect according to the present embodiment, based on the random number obtained by lottery of the preceding specific effect, the range (lower limit value) of the random numbers for which the subsequent specific effect is lottered is set to be executed in advance. It is possible to prevent a fall in execution of an effect having an expected degree lower than the expected degree of the specified effect.

Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect in accordance with the player's intention.

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Variation of scenario selection timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous variation described above, the press operation unit operable period is set in accordance with the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the scenario for executing the specific effect is selected at the timing when the press operation unit 405 is operated. Was. On the other hand, a case will be described in which all scenarios for executing a specific effect are selected at the start of fluctuation, as in the story reach described above.

When all the scenarios are selected at the start of fluctuation, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting processing (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting processing (FIG. 49), steps from step S1533 in the story reach setting processing (FIG. 53) are performed. The same process as S1538 is executed. With such a configuration, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in a state where all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect are set.

As described above, when all the scenarios are determined at the start of fluctuation, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated in the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect not executed is restricted (skip). You may. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, re-lottery may be executed to select the scenario again. In addition, without performing re-lottery, you may skip without executing the regulated specific effect and execute the preset specific effect, or release the restriction and specify based on the skipped scenario. You may execute the effect.

In addition, when the final specific effect is executed, even when the specific effect that should be executed in the middle is regulated, in order to inform the player of the final expectation, at the time of start of fluctuation You may make it perform the specific effect based on the determined scenario.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[12-5-2. Modification of specific performance execution conditions]
In the embodiment described above, by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

Other conditions include, for example, a symbol that is fixedly stopped, and a symbol that is a combination that does not appear at the time of losing, that is, when stopped at a so-called chance, a specific effect is executed without operating the pressing operation unit 405. It is good (at this time, it is not necessary to request the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Further, instead of the chance, the specific effect may be executed when the decorative design is stopped by a combination including the pseudo-relational exclusive symbol that appears only during the temporary suspension of the pseudo-replication. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be a symbol for exclusive use of pseudo-relation, and any one of the symbols to be displayed may be stopped as a symbol for exclusive use of pseudo-relation. Further, the specific effect may be executed when the image is stopped due to a normal pattern at the time of losing (so-called losing eye).

In addition, the timing of execution of the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable accessory) operates, a predetermined light emitting body (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Good.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right, and for example, the specific effect may be executed when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing. Further, the mode of effect may be changed according to the rotating direction of the dial.

As another operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick may be arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and the specific effect may be executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, even if a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, a player can input an operation from this touch panel, and a specific effect is executed by operating the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Good. In addition, since various inputs can be made on the touch panel, not only the selection of the specific effect but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed according to the operation content.

In addition to the contact type operation means as described above, a non-contact type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the player may perform an action such as holding his/her hand in front of the game board to execute the specific effect.

[13. Special map look-ahead production]
Next, the look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol is started will be described. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is a normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and a start-up memory that is a target of the pre-reading effect is consumed at a predetermined timing before the start-up memory is consumed. Based on the expectation of the variable display based on the continuous prefetching effect is configured to be executable.

In the normal prefetching effect, for example, a hold display of the starting memory of the prefetching target is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Further, the continuous prefetching effect is configured such that the mode of the hold display of the prefetch target start memory is changed every time the start memory that is displayed in a variable manner is exhausted. It should be noted that not only the mode of the hold display of the starting memory may be changed, but also the specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous variation may be executed at the timing of changing the mode of the hold display.

[13-1. Special drawing prefetching effect control processing]
First, the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the special drawing prefetching effect control processing in the present embodiment. In the special figure pre-reading effect control process, a process for executing the normal pre-reading effect and a process for deciding whether or not to execute the continuous pre-reading effect are executed. The special figure prefetching effect control process may be executed when the prefetching effect command is received in the received command analysis process.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 of FIG. 42) when the prefetching effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 of FIG. 48). When the special figure prereading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the prefetching effect is not executed, and the special figure prereading effect control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is "Yes"), the effect control program is normally based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the start-up memory of the pre-reading target. A mode of prefetching effect is selected (step S2002). At this time, the aspect of the normal look-ahead effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting memory of the look-ahead target.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the normal prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins the starting mouth, except for the case where the number of starting memories that are held is 0, regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol that is currently being executed, the mode of the held display is displayed. Change at a predetermined rate.

When the pre-reading effect is not executed, the hold display is "white", but when the pre-reading effect is normally executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from "white" to a big hit according to the degree of expectation. The probability (Fig. 67) changes to "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow". Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the hold display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a big hit.

When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal prefetch effect setting process for performing setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal prefetching effect setting process, the setting is made to change the display color of the hold display, and at the same time, the effect sound is output, the lamp is turned on, and the accessory is moved. After that, the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal prefetching effect from being executed a plurality of times for one starting memory.

In the present embodiment, the continuous prefetching effect is executed only when the normal prefetching effect is executed. That is, the player comes to have a sense of expectation by the normal look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball wins at the starting opening, and has a greater expectation as the mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses. Note that the continuous prefetching effect may be executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. For example, when the number of held starting memories is large, the continuous prefetching effect is executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. You may do it. In particular, it is effective when the upper starting opening and the lower starting opening can always win, and the starting openings can be alternately prized to hold up to eight starting memories.

The effect control program determines whether or not the normal look-ahead effect is executed (step S2005). When the normal pre-reading effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, when the color of the hold display remains “white”, the special pre-reading effect is executed without executing the continuous pre-reading effect. The production control process ends.

When the normal prefetch effect is executed (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program is based on various information included in the prefetch effect command received from the main control board 4100, and the continuous prefetch effect lottery table ( The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 68) (step S2006), and whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect is selected by lottery (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, fluctuation patterns and winning/losing information. In addition, the starting memory number (the number of special symbol operation holding balls) is included in the special symbol storage command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous prefetching effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special map prefetching effect control process is ended.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the continuous prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. The continuous prefetching effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of starting memories is 3 or more because the mode of the hold display changes over a plurality of fluctuations. Further, when the result of the variable display based on the starting memory is a big hit (or there is a high possibility of a big hit), the continuous prefetching effect is easily executed, and the number of continuous prefetching is set to increase easily. ..

In addition, the lottery whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007) is performed based on the continuous prefetching effect execution probability. Further, when the reach does not occur in the starting memory of the prefetch target, the continuous prefetch effect is set not to be executed. The unit of the continuous prefetching effect execution probability in FIG. 68 is %.

When performing the continuous prefetching effect (the result of step S2007 is "Yes"), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous prefetching effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous prefetching effect executions is set to the remaining effect number (remaining prefetching number) (step S2009).

Furthermore, the production control program sets the range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the continuous prefetching effect to the specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure prefetching effect control process is ended.

[13-2. Continuous prefetch effect setting process]
Next, the continuous prefetching effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. The continuous prefetching effect setting process is a process of controlling the prefetching effect for the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the starting memory of the prefetching effect target is changed at the timing when the starting memory of executing the variable display game is exhausted prior to the starting memory of the prefetching effect target. Execute the process.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous prefetching effect setting process of the present embodiment. The continuous prefetching effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special diagram prefetching effect control process (FIG. 66) when the continuous prefetching effect is executed. When the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous prefetching effect is not executed, so the continuous prefetching effect process is ended.

On the other hand, when the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is "Yes"), the effect control program acquires a random number value for selecting the prefetch effect (specific effect) to be executed ( Step S2102). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, the mode of the specific effect is acquired from the continuous prefetch effect mode selection table (FIG. 70) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings for executing the continuous prefetching effect (specific effect) are performed.

In the continuous prefetching effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. Further, since the continuous pre-reading effect is executed in the state where the normal pre-reading effect is executed, the shape is controlled so as to change in the state where the color of the hold display changes. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the continuous prefetching effect mode selection table for selecting the mode of the hold display in the continuous prefetching effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the present embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a random number range is set for each specific effect. For example, in the case where the effect selection pattern is "pattern 2," the random effect value is 0 to 200, the specific effect 1, 201 to 400, the specific effect 2,..., 901 to 1000 The specific effect 6 is selected.

Further, in the pattern 1, the specific effect 5 and the specific effect 6 with high expectations are not selected, and in the patterns 2 and 3, all the specific effects can be executed. The range of random numbers is set so that it is difficult to select a high specific effect. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 with low expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 or the specific effect 5 with high expectation is easily selected. As shown in FIG. 68, the pattern 1 is selected as a variation pattern with low expectation, while the pattern 4 is selected when the result of the variation display game is a big hit.

In addition, when the same shape as the previously executed continuous prefetch effect is selected, the game may be allowed to proceed as if the continuous prefetch effect was not executed, or the hold display is temporarily blinked. For example, the player may be informed that the continuous prefetching effect has been executed.

Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. 69. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the remaining effect number (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all continuous prefetch effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S2106 is "Yes"), all the continuous prefetch effects have been executed, so the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, "0") (step S2108), and the continuous prefetching effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (result of step S2106 is "No"), that is, if the continuous prefetching effects are not all executed, the effect control program obtains the random number value obtained in the process of step S2102. Based on, the lower limit of the random number is set (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted in the effect selection pattern “pattern 3” is “350”, the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, the fall. The lower limit value of the random number is set to the lower limit value “201” in the case where the specific effect 3 is selected so as not to occur. As a result, when the next continuous prefetching effect is executed, a random number value in the range of "201" to "1000" is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the randomness value in the range of "201" to "1000" is extracted before the effect that was executed in advance. It is possible to prevent the production with low expectations from being executed.

In the continuous prefetching effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the hold display changes in stages. For example, when the effect selection pattern is "Pattern 3" and the number of continuous prefetch executions is "3", the lower limit value is "0" and the upper limit value is "4" so that the specific effect executed first is 1 to 4. 600". At this time, if the specific effect executed first is 2, the lower limit value and the upper limit value of the random number values for selecting the specific effect executed the second time are set to "201" and "800", respectively. That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing so, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation is always high (so that the expected value is raised), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is generated in the next (last) specific effect. Is selected, and the specific effect can be executed so as to prevent the fall and surely increase the expectation. It should be noted that if it is set so as to be surely established, it is possible to greatly enhance the expectation of the player, and therefore it may be controlled so as to be surely established only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Performance example]
Through the above-described processing, it is possible to select the specific effect so that the fall does not occur in the continuous prefetching effect. Subsequently, a specific example of the continuous prefetching effect will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the continuous prefetching effect of the present embodiment.

FIG. 71(A) is a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in a state where the prefetching effect is not being executed. FIG. 71(B) shows a state in which the normal look-ahead effect is executed as a result of the game ball winning the upper starting opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 71(A). Then, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the decorative design is confirmed and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the pending start-up memory is exhausted and the next variable display is started. At this time, the first continuous prefetching effect is executed and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 71D to 71G, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed every time the held starting memory is exhausted and the variable display is started, and the shape of the held display is changed. Change.

Then, when the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect is digested and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (FIG. 71(H)), the reach occurs (FIG. 71(I)). In the example shown in FIG. 71(J), SP reach 3 is executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed (the effect mode is changed) based on the progress of the game, thereby further increasing the player's expectation in the process of continuing the game. Is possible. In particular, for the variable display game that is executed after the prefetch effect (normal prefetch effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the starting opening and before the start memory that is the target of the prefetch effect is exhausted. Although there is a possibility that the entertainment level of the game may deteriorate, the mode of the hold display changes each time the variable display game is executed, so that the player's expectation can be continuously increased, and the entertainment level of the game decreases. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modification of special figure prefetching effect]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure prefetching effect control]
Note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetching effect and the continuous prefetching effect. In the above-described embodiment, the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the start opening in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), and the hold display in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (continuous look-ahead effect). The mode (shape) of the hold display changes at the time of digestion. In this case, whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect is determined only at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and the content of the specific effect (change of the hold display) is drawn when the hold is exhausted.

On the other hand, like Story Reach, the contents (scenarios) of all the specific effects may be drawn by lot at the time of winning the start prize. For example, all the special effects are selected by lottery in the special drawing prefetching effect control processing (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 66). In the process (step S1408) of setting the special figure prefetch effect execution flag of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be selected by lottery.

Further, when the number of holding memories is 2 or less at the time of starting winning and the variable display is being executed, the number of times of continuous prefetching effect is set to 1, and when the number of holding memories is 3 or more, the continuous prefetching effect lottery table ( It is sufficient to select the mode of the continuous prefetch effect based on FIG. 68) (all patterns may be covered by the continuous prefetch effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (the same as the normal look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. ..

Further, when the number of pre-reading effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of winning the start prize and thereafter the mode of the hold display does not change, the gaze effect having a very low expectation may be obtained. That is, the greater the number of changes in the hold mode, the higher the expectation of a big hit, but the expectation may be low when it is only once.

[13-4-2. Special map 2 priority digestion]
In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variable display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the upper special symbol display device 1185 when the game ball is won in the upper starting opening 2101, and the game ball is won in the lower starting opening 2102. In this case, the second special symbol variation display game in which the special symbols are variably displayed on the lower special symbol display device 1186, is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the lower starting opening 2102, the variable display is started with priority over when the game ball is won in the upper starting opening 2101. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the starting memory in which the game ball is won in the upper starting opening 2101, if the game ball is won in the lower starting opening 2102, the start-up memory of the pre-reading effect will be delayed in digestion. Become.

In this way, when the variable display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. Further, the specific effect based on the scenario selected by lottery may be executed, and the specific effect to be executed last may be continuously executed by the interrupted amount.

Further, the scenario may be reselected according to the interrupted amount. At this time, the range of random numbers may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the executed specific effect so that the effect content does not fall, and a new scenario may be drawn, or the executed scenario may be ignored. Alternatively, the range of random numbers may be initialized to newly draw a scenario.

Further, when a game ball is won in the lower starting port 2102, the specific effect may be executed only on the variable display corresponding to the starting memory that is won in the upper starting port 2101 without executing the specific effect.

Further, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game can be executed simultaneously, for example, a specific effect is produced in accordance with the execution of the first special figure variation display game. Just run it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the normal symbol is won, the starting opening solenoid 2105 is driven and the movable piece 2106 is opened/closed, so that the game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 2102. However, when the game balls enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 alternately, and the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed alternately, an interruption occurs. Does not occur. In this case, control may be performed in the same manner as in the case of executing only the first special figure variable display game, but since variable display for up to eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished and long It is possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period, and it is possible to execute effects that are rich in variation.

[13-4-3. Modification of special figure prefetching effect mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a structure or a natural object of a special aspect may be arranged behind the decorative pattern or the character. For example, the cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the expectation of a big hit, or thunder may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Modified example of random number lottery]
In the production example described above, the fall is prevented by changing the range (upper limit value, lower limit value) for generating the random numbers, but the fall may be prevented by other methods. Good. A case will be described where the effect selection pattern 1 shown in FIG. 54 is selected.

For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, in the range of "0" to "1000"), the extracted random number value is converted by a process such as calculation so that the specific effect is selected. May be. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. Explaining such an example, in order to prevent the fall, random numbers are set to be generated in the range of "0" to "600". Here, a random number is generated in the range of “0” to “1000” and is multiplied by “600/1000” (rounding down after the decimal point) to generate a random number in the range of “0” to “600”. be able to.

Further, when generating a random number in the range of “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range of “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as the random number value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” are duplicated, the random number is unevenly distributed. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range is Set by adding (600-400=200 in this case) to the random number value (that is, changing the overlapping range from “200” to “600”) to increase the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectations. Then, the player's expectation may be increased.

As another example, when a random number in the range of “0” to “1000” is generated, a random number generated in the range of “0” to “100” is generated 10 times, and each generated random number is generated. Alternatively, a random number in the range of “0” to “1000” may be generated. With this configuration, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of actually generated random numbers constant by setting and adding the number of times of random number generation according to the range of generated random numbers. it can. Further, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, a random number in the range of “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying the random number generated in the range of “0” to “100” by 10. Although fine-grained distribution cannot be performed, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. Further, the random number extraction method may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the extracted random numbers may be adjusted as necessary.

Moreover, after extracting a random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed first, the random number for selecting the subsequent specific effect may be added to the random number for selecting the preceding specific effect. .. At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the added random number value does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be discarded.

[15. Allowance of falling (breaking the law)]
[15-1. Performance example]
In the embodiment described above, it is possible to prevent a decline in the expectation of the effect content for the specific effect that is continuously executed. However, even if the drop does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect having a high degree of expectation is first executed, the player may predict the flow of the subsequent effect, and it may not be possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Therefore, a modification will be described in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the fall is allowed and the effect pattern that is normally executed is changed. The condition for allowing the falling may be determined, for example, whether or not to carry out according to the game state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display and the operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric auditors. Specifically, if the probability that the fluctuation display result is a big hit is high (high probability state, probability variation state), or if it is in a state advantageous to the player such as a time saving state, the random number generation range is not adjusted. May be allowed to fall. Conversely, in the case of a state other than the probability variation state or the time saving state that is not advantageous to the player, the fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

Further, the falling may be allowed only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. In other words, the player can recognize that the big hit will be decided on the contrary when the disappointing performance is executed. In this way, when the effect that is not executed in the normal flow is executed, on the contrary, the expectation level is increased, so that the variation of the effect can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be increased. It is also possible to allow the fall even in the normal time (with a low probability) while controlling such that the fall is unlikely to occur and increase the probability of the fall when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the fall is allowed according to the variation pattern instead of the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after pseudo-continuous production, etc.) occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when the reach with low reliability occurs, the fall may occur more easily than with the reach with high reliability. In this way, whether or not the fall is acceptable may be associated with the effect contents, instead of the result of the variable display game.

Further, the reliability of the variation pattern when the result of the variation display game is a big hit may be allowed to fall. For example, the fluctuation pattern (reach) with high reliability is set to have a higher possibility of falling than that when the fluctuation pattern (reach) with low reliability is selected. On the contrary, the low reliability variation pattern (reach) may be more likely to cause a fall than when the high reliability variation pattern (reach) is selected.

In addition, when the obscure mode that does not clearly inform whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probability variation state is executed after the jackpot game is over, a random number is generated only when the actual probability state is the normal state. You may make it adjust the production|generation range of. In this case, if the probability state is a probabilistic state, the probability of winning the variable display game is high even if the downfall occurs, and as a result, the player is less discouraged, and in the normal state, the downfall occurs. Since it does not, the player is less likely to be discouraged by the story reach production. Conversely, only in the case of the probable state, the random number generation range may be adjusted to prevent the fall. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the fall.

Further, in the unclear mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when the fall occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. It is also possible to set two types of modes, a mode in which the random number generation range is adjusted to the unclear mode and a mode in which the random number generation range is not adjusted. Furthermore, the player may be allowed to select one of these modes. With this configuration, the player can select whether to be able to recognize the probability state at an early stage or to be able to execute an effect with less discouragement.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, the control for allowing the fall will be described. In this embodiment, the random number generation range is adjusted in order to prevent the drop, but a specific procedure will be described.

For example, when allowing the falling, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number is reset to the specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the fall does not occur, but in the case of causing the fall as a big hit notification effect, the range of random numbers may be set so that the fall always occurs. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set not to the specified value (initial value) but to be returned by a predetermined step. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability and stage of the fall.

Further, as described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by overlappingly generating random numbers in a predetermined range. In this case, the probability of occurrence of a fall (rise) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range to a range in which a fall occurs or, conversely, a range in which a rise occurs. Furthermore, the range of the random number generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by 1 at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing), but the value to be incremented may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal game state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability change state). By changing the updating method of the random number counter in this way, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the downfall according to the gaming state.

[16. Processing when power is cut off]
Here, in the received command analysis process, a process when a power cut command or a power-on command is received will be described.

As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted when the external power supply to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Before the power cut command is transmitted, as described above, the main control board 4100 outputs the power failure notice signal, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is executed to perform processing such as command backup. Is executed.

The peripheral control board 4140 executes processing according to the mode in which the power is cut off. Specifically, when the power supply from the outside is stopped and the power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, the power supply is cut off only to the main control board 4100. In this case, the power supply to only the peripheral control board 4140 may be cut off. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is powered off]
When the power supply to only the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off due to a wiring contact failure or the like, the game control in the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is not lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, the hot start is performed as described above. To restart (continue) the production control.

Even when the effect control is restarted by a hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply is temporarily cut off. For the notification of power supply interruption, for example, an initial screen when the power is turned on may be displayed, or a screen notifying that the power is cut off may be displayed.

Further, there is a possibility that a deviation may occur between the time measurement (timer) in the main control board 4100 and the time measurement in the peripheral control board 4140 due to the power-off. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of variation of the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variable display of the decorative pattern ends later, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received. Further, when it is necessary to display the initial symbol at the start of fluctuation, the default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than a jackpot, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

Further, when the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, it is sufficient to correct the deviation of the time measurement at the timing of receiving the special winning opening closing display command or the ending command indicating that the game is going to the next round.

When the storage contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written in the storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c which is normally used, and the effect control is restarted as a cold start.

When the effect (variation pattern) accompanied by the specific effect is executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of the series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the scenario lottery result may be discarded and the scenario may be re-lottered. When a scenario is drawn at the time of execution of each specific effect, draw a scenario for executing the subsequent specific effects until the timing when all the final specific effects are finished so that there is no discrepancy in the content of each specific effect. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be executed. Whether the cold start or the hot start is performed, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power of the peripheral control board is cut off.

[16-2. When power is cut off only for the main control board]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power cut command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) when the power is shut off. After that, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is restarted, a command to notify the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. The command notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

When the game state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the effect that is currently being executed, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect that is not mistakenly recognized by the player is executed. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect that is being executed is, for example, a state in which the result of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or a round effect during a big hit game. The effect that the player does not erroneously recognize is, for example, when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, all the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable display at a high speed, or a decorative pattern dedicated to an abnormal state is displayed. If the big hit game is being played, it is sufficient to display only the big hit game without displaying the number of rounds.

If the game state is different from the display state during the current performance, the abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed to restore the normal state. It should be noted that the abnormality notification screen may be any display that allows the player to recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, the execution of the specific effect is stopped when the variable display is executed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the variation pattern of the story reach, and even if the continuous prefetching effect is ongoing, the execution of the specific effect thereafter (scenario lottery) ) Is canceled.

[16-3. When the power to the main control board and peripheral control boards is cut off]
When the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the main control board 4100 is supplied with power from the backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are retained for a predetermined period. As described above, the main control board 4100 transmits the power interruption command to the peripheral control board 4140.

After that, when power is supplied to the game machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 of the game state, and when the game is not in the game stopped state such as the customer waiting state, the peripheral control board 4140 notifies that the power is cut off. After executing, the production is switched to one that does not mislead the player such as waiting for customers. After that, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to restore the normal state. In this case, the execution of the specific effect is stopped when the variable display is being executed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the variation pattern of the story reach, and even if the continuous prefetching effect is ongoing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery) ) Is canceled.

[16-4. Summary at power off]
With the above-described configuration, whether the variable display is continuously executed in the pseudo continuous variation or the variation pattern of the story reach even when the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off. Whether or not it can be appropriately determined.

[17. Normal drawing lookahead production]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetch effect (universal figure prefetch effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol type prefetching effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the general figure prefetching effect is executed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the universal figure prefetching effect control process in the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the general picture prefetching effect of the present embodiment.

When the universal figure prefetching effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type prefetching effect command is received. When the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program does not execute the universal figure prefetching effect, and thus ends this processing.

On the other hand, when the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the general figure prefetching effect is currently being executed (step S2202). When the universal figure prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the processing of step S2207 and subsequent steps is executed to continue the general figure prefetching effect.

When the universal figure prefetching effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition of the universal figure prefetching effect is satisfied (step S2203). As for the execution condition of the universal figure prefetching effect, for example, it is determined whether or not it can be established according to the game state or the execution status of other effects. When the execution condition of the universal figure prefetching effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of executing the general picture prefetching effect is not particularly limited. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (special figure synchronization effect) may be executed independently of the execution state. As shown in FIG. 73(A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is being variably displayed, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the universal figure prefetching effect is executed. Further, the execution timing of the universal figure prefetching effect may be the timing when the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the general figure prefetching effect may be performed in parallel while the special figure prefetching effect is being performed.

On the other hand, even when the command (normal symbol type prefetch effect command) for instructing execution of the general figure prefetch effect is received from the main control board, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general figure prefetch effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when the player's attention (for example, reach effect) is being executed, or when a special effect is executed during execution of the general picture prefetching effect, the execution condition of the general picture prefetching effect is set. As a non-establishment, the execution of the general picture prefetching effect may be restricted. Further, in order to prevent a plurality of types of advance notice productions from being executed at the same time, when the special lottery advance notice advance notices are being executed, the execution of the normal lottery advance notice advance notices is restricted by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Good.

In the universal figure prefetching effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(B), a star-shaped universal figure prefetching effect area is displayed in the upper right part of the screen, and the symbols are variably displayed within the area ( FIG. 73(C)). Then, as a result of the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the hit (“O”, FIG. 73(D)) and the symbol corresponding to the deficit (“−”, FIG. 73(E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the universal figure lottery Is notified. The player may shoot a game ball aiming at the lower starting opening 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the normal picture prefetching effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit has stopped, the player may be informed to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower starting opening 2102. At this time, in order to secure a time for the player to aim and fire the lower starting opening 2102, the effect control program outputs the result of the universal figure prefetching effect a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set depending on the type of winning in the normal lottery, the player can play the game according to the degree of advantage for the player (ease of winning the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102). It may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the diagram prefetching effect is satisfied. For example, as the movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the movable piece 2106 is set to be moved many times. At this time, the general picture prefetching notice may be executed only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player such as long release.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of types of symbols other than winning and winning, and to set a stop symbol in accordance with the degree of expectation that the ordinary lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop pattern may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. As a result of the winning of the universal drawing lottery, when the movable piece 2106 is moved in the long open mode, a stop symbol is set to notify as a win, and in the case of the short open mode, it is neither a hit nor a miss. It may be a stop pattern.

In addition, in the case of a time saving state in which the variation time of the normal symbol is short, the normal symbol type prefetch effect may not be executed. This is because the winning probability is high, the profit for the player is small even when the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, so that it is not possible to secure a sufficient time for executing the universal figure prefetching effect. That is, whether or not to execute the universal figure prefetching effect may be determined according to the game state.

When the execution condition for the universal figure prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is "Yes"), the effect control program displays the universal figure prefetching effect area (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for varying and displaying the symbols in the universal figure prefetching effect, the universal figure prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the universal figure prefetching effect is started (step S2206). The time until the universal figure prefetching effect timer times out may be fixed, may be according to the game state, may be according to the variation time of the normal symbol, or may be a combination thereof.

Furthermore, when the universal figure prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is "yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the universal figure prefetching effect timer has timed up (step S2207). When the figure-reading effect timer has not expired (result of step S2207 is "no"), the figure-reading effect is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the universal figure prefetching effect timer times out (result of step S2207 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the prefetching result of the general figure lottery, and thus stops and displays the changing symbols ( Step S2208). Finally, the universal figure prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this processing ends.

In addition, the general picture prefetching effect described above is executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, the general picture prefetching effect is not only displayed on the display device, but also executed by multiple effect devices such as moving movable accessories, illuminating light emitters such as lamps, and outputting sound from speakers. This may be possible, or a combination of a plurality of effect devices may be possible. When performing the universal figure prefetching effect in combination with a plurality of effect devices, in addition to the case of simultaneously executing the effect by a plurality of effect devices, the general image prefetch effect is executed by any one of the effect devices. May be. For example, when the general picture prefetching effect is performed by screen display and audio output, the general picture prefetching effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, when an error is being notified, another (prefetching) effect is being executed, etc. In the case of ), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the universal figure prefetch effect by the audio output is executed. Further, instead of restricting the execution of the universal figure prefetching effect, the universal figure prefetching effect may be executed overlapping with other effects. In this case, the presentation mode of the general picture prefetching presentation is changed. For example, the screen display may be made semi-transparent to perform the general picture prefetching effect, or the volume may be reduced to perform voice output.

[18. Effects, etc.]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by dynamically changing the range of random number values in accordance with the game state, etc., to prevent falling without complicating the control, consistent continuous performance is performed. can do.

Further, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag for executing the specific effect and the random number initial value are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during execution of the effect and the effect cannot be continued.

In addition, when there is a start winning that causes a big hit or a small hit during execution of the performance, when there is a starting prize that causes a specific variation pattern (for example, a rare variation pattern with high expectation), a game Even when the transition condition of the state (game mode) is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

For example, in the specification in which the variable display based on the winning of the game ball in the lower starting opening 2102 is executed with priority over the case where the upper starting opening 2101 is won, the result of the variable display executed with priority is When the above initialization conditions such as a big hit are satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being interrupted when an event such as the occurrence of a big hit or a change in the game state occurs and being restarted in a halfway state.

Further, the present invention may be applied not only in order to prevent falling, but also in the case of performing an effect that is continuously executed and has an order.

For example, it may be applied in the case of selecting the effect for each round in the big hit game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect contents may be selected for each predetermined number of rounds (for example, for every three rounds in the big hit game of 15 rounds). In addition, a common effect may be executed up to an intermediate round (for example, 7 out of 15 rounds), and effect contents may be selected for the subsequent rounds (for example, 8 rounds or later). At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game executed after the big hit game ends includes the start memory that is a big hit, the effect pattern in which the special effect is easily executed is selected and the continuous big hit is performed. It may be suggested (notified) to the player that there is.

As described above, the feature of the present invention is that by dynamically changing the range of random number values in accordance with the game state, it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating the control. Become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to hold a notice lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of the specific production in the story reach, the pseudo continuous variation, and the continuous look-ahead production, so that the storage capacity increases with the diversification of production. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special map prefetching (judgment/production)]
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetching determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 inhibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on main control board side (prohibition of pre-reading judgment of special map)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are examples of tables for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to special figure prefetching among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 74 is an example of a table showing a modification of the command “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. It is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as the above is omitted.

The starting mouth winning command is an instruction to start the starting mouth winning effect. Here, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the mode value is set to "01H", and the lower starting based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to "02H".

Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing when the special symbol 1 hold number has changed (the increase timing of the hold number (starting memory number) due to the game ball winning in the upper starting opening 2101, or the upper special symbol display 1185) In the decrease timing of the number of holding due to the variable display), the special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a, and further, when the number of special symbol 1 holding increases (at the time of winning the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101), the special symbol A command to specify the number of 1 hold numbers has been sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of reservation number information, and mode values “00H” to “04H” are set in accordance with this. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies not only the hold number at the time of increase but also the presence or absence of prefetch effect. The special symbol 1 hold number designation command represents "pre-reading" information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is "1", and "no pre-reading" information when the upper bit of the mode value is "0" It represents. Then, when the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is "prefetching", it also plays a role of instructing the start of the prefetching effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration except that the special symbol 1 has a different status value.

On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 74 ), the command to be transmitted is different when the number of special symbols 1 held decreases (at the start of fluctuation) and when it increases (at the time of winning at the start opening). Timing when the special symbol 1 hold number has decreased (decrease timing of the hold number due to variable display on the upper special symbol display device 1185), that is, at the start timing of the variable display, a fluctuation start special symbol 1 storage command indicating the number of hold balls Will be sent. Therefore, the fluctuation start special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holdings is reduced has 0 to 3 pieces of holding number information, and mode values “01H” to “04H” are set in accordance with this. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 reserved has increased (the timing of increasing the number of reserved balls due to winning a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101), a pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence or absence of pre-reading is transmitted. It Therefore, the pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-read command transmitted when the number of holdings increases has 1 to 4 holding number information, and the mode values “*2H” to “*5H” are set in accordance with this. The upper 4 bits "*" of the mode value are set to "0" when "no prefetch" and set to "1" when "prefetch". The setting of the pre-reading presence/absence information is performed in the process of step S242 (“no pre-reading”) and the process of step S280 (“pre-reading”) of the storage pre-reading process (FIG. 76) described later. The pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the setting of the status value and the mode value forming the command is the same. different. In addition, the variation start special symbol 2 storage command and the pre-read special symbol 2 storage pre-read command have the same configuration except that the special symbol 1 has a different status value.

Further, only when there is pre-reading (that is, when the leading address of the mode value of the special pattern 1 (2) storage pre-reading command during pre-reading is "1"), the pattern type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command and the variation type A look-ahead command is sent. In the modification, the variable allocation table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting transmission of the variable allocation table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

Here, with reference to FIG. 76, the storage prefetch processing of the modified example will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the memory prefetch processing of the modified example. It should be noted that processes common to the above-described storage prefetching process (FIG. 24) will be assigned the same reference numerals and explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as described above, the variable allocation table information prefetch command is transmitted when the prefetch determination is performed. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a sets the command indicating the pre-reading result (the symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command and the variation type pre-reading command) in the command buffer for sending to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). At this time, the variable allocation table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The variable distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command acquired in the process of step S284 is the special symbol storage pre-reading command (FIG. 74) during pre-reading of the corresponding special drawing. As described above, the pre-read special symbol 1(2) storage pre-read command has the same information as the special symbol 1(2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

Returning to FIG. 74. The symbol type pre-reading command is a special jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and a special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory prefetching process (step S252, FIG. 28). It is a command that specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, in accordance with the result of the special symbol big hit determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol/flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation. There is a special figure 1 (2) design classification command as a command for designating out, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

The mode values of the symbol type prefetch command (FIG. 74) and the special figure 1(2) symbol type command (FIG. 75) are associated with the outfall or the big hit symbol types 0 to 48. In the symbol type prefetch command, the mode value “01H” is set for the deviation, and the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for each symbol type with respect to the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and unspecified. The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values "47H" to "50H" are set for each symbol type even for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the non-specific big hit (small hit). ..

The variation pattern look-ahead command is a command for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern) as described above. The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the memory prefetch process (FIG. 76). It is set using. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set an effect mode from a plurality of numbers, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed effect contents (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

The fluctuation type prefetch command is a command that specifies information (addition value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous fluctuation for the set fluctuation pattern. The added value of time is set by using the random number for fluctuation type in the fluctuation type determination processing (step S262, FIG. 31) of the memory prefetch processing (FIG. 76). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation is not performed by the variation type random number, the variation time of the set variation pattern is maintained. In addition, when it is determined that the pseudo random fluctuation is performed by the fluctuation type random number, the pseudo continuous fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation type (one of types A to C) corresponding to the preset fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation type random number. The number of times of variation (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the additional value of time is associated with the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous variation, the additional value of time is set by determining the number of times of execution for each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

The variation allocation table information prefetch command is a command for designating a variation allocation table used when determining a variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of variation. As described above, in the variation allocation table, the jackpot variation selection information type table (the jackpot distribution table) used when the jackpot is the jackpot (“yes” in step S350), but when the reach effect is provided, the jackpot is selected (step). The reach variation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for "yes" in S372, and the departure variation selection information table ("no" in step S372) when the reach production is not performed ("no" in step S372). A non-reach sorting table) is provided. Further, the variation distribution table at the start of variation set in the variation distribution table information prefetch command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the above-mentioned three distribution tables. The reach or non-reach sorting table has a reach determination random number that may change the result of the reach determination as to whether or not the reach production should be performed if the number of holding balls changes at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation (starting memory ) Is a table set for

Here, with reference to FIG. 77, an advantage of transmitting the variable allocation table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands will be described. FIG. 77 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) variation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation allocation table described above, and (B) depending on the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. 3 is an example of a reach execution availability table.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, a big hit determination is made using a big hit determination random number, and in the case of a big hit, a big hit distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is out of alignment, the reach determination is performed using the reach determination random number. In the reach judgment, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is larger than the comparison value. Is set. Then, the effect mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the effect mode.

In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the comparison value (reach threshold) changes according to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is 4 is 10, and the comparison value is incremented by 10 each time the number of reserved balls is decreased by 1. In this case, when the reach determination random numbers are 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the result of the reach determination differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so that either the reach allocation table or the non-reach allocation table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Therefore, the mode value of the variable allocation table information prefetch command is "01H" when the big hit determination result is a big hit, "02H" when the reach judgment random number is 0 to 9 when the big hit judgment result is a big hit, and a reach judgment random number. Is set to 10 to 49, "03H" is set, and when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, "04H" is set.

In this way, by transmitting the variation allocation table information pre-reading command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of pre-reading, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform pre-reading and start of fluctuation for the hold of the mode value "03H". It is possible to execute the prefetching effect control in consideration that the result of the reach determination may change when the number of reserved balls changes. In the memory prefetch process (FIG. 76), when the mode value of the variable allocation table information prefetch command is “03H”, the process of setting the hold command reference value with prefetch in step S280 is not performed, You may make it maintain the state which set the hold command reference value at the time of no pre-reading of S242. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs pre-reading determination but does not transmit pre-reading determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command of "no prefetch" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the prefetch effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

As described above, the special symbol 1 storage pre-read command (special symbol 2 storage pre-read command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of winning the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 (lower starting opening 2102) is reserved. Information on whether or not the prefetching effect is performed (“prefetching” or “no prefetching”) is included with the ball count information. Then, only in the case of "pre-reading", the symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command and the variation allocation table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and in the case of "no pre-reading", these pre-reading commands are not transmitted. .. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) transmitted at the time of the start opening winning a prize, without waiting for the reception of another prefetch command. It is possible to determine whether it is an execution target. Peripheral control MPU4150a, if the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command of "preread" (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) is received (when specific game information is received), reception of another prefetch command or special drawing After setting the prefetch effect execution flag (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) and executing the process (first preliminary process) for satisfying the execution condition of the prefetch effect, the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 42 step S1027, the second preliminary process) is executed to execute the prefetching effect. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of "no prefetch", it is possible to know that the prefetch command is not transmitted later, so other Without waiting for the reception of the pre-reading command, the non-execution determination of the pre-reading effect (the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is not set) can be immediately cut. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prereading effect control processing (FIG. 66) which is the second preprocessing without executing the first preprocessing, and the special figure prereading effect execution flag is set. Since it has not been performed (“No” in step S2001), the special figure prefetching effect control process is ended without executing the prefetching effect.

Further, when the pre-reading determination is not made on the main control board 4100 side (when the command of "no pre-reading" is received), the peripheral control board 4140 needs a command (symbol type pre-reading command, variation) necessary for setting the pre-reading effect. Since the pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command, and the variable allocation table information pre-reading command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the time of winning the start mouth (pre-reading) is simplified and the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the pre-reading effect. It is possible to prevent erroneous control from occurring. Further, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit the presence/absence information of pre-reading to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure of pre-reading presentation that may occur in the progress of the game, so that the appropriate pre-reading presentation Can facilitate execution. The condition for setting "no prefetch" in the special symbol 1(2) memory prefetch command (that is, the condition for the main control board 4100 to prohibit prefetch) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the symbol type pre-read command transmitted at the time of winning opening winning (pre-reading), the specific jackpot (first specified result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is set a different mode value for each specific jackpot type, but the condition A common mode value is set for a non-specific big hit (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit without the operation of the device, regardless of the non-specific big hit type. That is, when the pre-reading determination result is the specific jackpot (first identifying result), the main control board 4100 issues a command (first identifying information) in which the mode value is set so that the type of the specific jackpot can be identified. When the pre-reading determination result is a non-specific big hit (second specific result), a command (second specific information) having a unified mode value that cannot specify the non-specific big hit type is transmitted. In the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, a different mode value is set for each non-specific big hit type. As a result, with respect to the hold that is a so-called small hit, which is a non-specific big hit, even the peripheral control board 4140 cannot grasp the type until the start of variation. There is no danger of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

For example, a special winning opening is opened upon the occasion of a small hit, and a V zone winning structure of two types of feathers is provided in which a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) to a specific area (V zone) within the special winning opening. On a pachinko machine, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area varies depending on the type of small hit. That is, it is determined whether or not the big hit can be derived according to the type of the small hit. Further, since the types of big hits that are derived differ according to the types of small hits, the benefits (time saving times, etc.) that can be obtained by the player are different. Therefore, the small hit type information becomes more important to the player. If such a pachinko machine performs a look-ahead effect in which the type of small hit can be grasped, the player can make a distinction according to the type of small hit, and can easily aim for a big hit or a specific privilege. Therefore, by preventing the pre-reading effect depending on the type of small hit, the predictable element (information) is not given to the player until the variation starts. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Conditions for prohibiting prefetch judgment]
FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing conditions for prohibiting the prefetching by the main control board 4100 of the modified example (A), and is a diagram for explaining the effect of inhibiting the prefetching at the time of state transition (B).

In the aforementioned memory prefetching process (FIG. 76), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing of the game ball starting winning and the timing at which the variation actually starts (“yes” in step S244), or If the table is not changed and the prefetch determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the prefetch determination is prohibited. Then, when the pre-reading determination is prohibited, "no pre-reading" is set in the special symbol 1(2) storage pre-reading command.

Here, as shown in FIG. 78(A), when the tables for selecting the variation patterns are different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of winning the start winning is the probability at the time of the variation start. It may be different from the state or the time saving state at the time of winning a prize may become a non-time saving state at the start of fluctuation. It indicates when (the number of games) falls within four times. In this case, the look-ahead determination is prohibited regardless of the type of special symbol.

In the case of the prefetch determination prohibition period (“yes” in step S246), the game state at the time of winning the game ball into the upper starting opening (special opening 1 starting opening) 2101 is the time saving state or the operation of the condition device. The case where it is a big hit game state accompanied or the case where the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is the non-time saving state or the big hit gaming state is shown. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball prize (occurrence of special symbol 2 hold) to the lower starting opening (special drawing 2 starting opening) 2102 is limited to the time saving state, the lower starting opening (special drawing 2) The look-ahead determination is prohibited when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the (starting opening) 2102 is the non-time saving state (not the time saving state). In addition, even if you look ahead to the special symbol hold that occurred during the big hit game, during the big hit game, regardless of the game state up to that point, the normal (low) probability state and non-time saving state, so the special symbol There is a high possibility that the game state is different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the prefetch determination may be reduced. Therefore, even when the gaming state at the time of winning the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (when the special symbol is held) is a big hit game, the prefetch determination is prohibited.

As shown in FIG. 78(B), when the state A shifts to the state B when 100 times of fluctuations have been exhausted, the number of maintenances (remaining fluctuations) of the state A becomes 4 (97 in the state A). The look-ahead judgment is prohibited at the start of the second fluctuation). The pre-reading determination prohibition period extends from the state A to the state B.

The prize 1 generated immediately before the 97th variation in the state A starts is consumed as the 97th variation if all the reserved memories 1 to 4 areas are not retained, but is retained in the reserved memories 1 to 3 area. If there is, it is stored in each of the reserved storage areas 2 to 4 as the second to fourth reserved areas. Then, it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuations. In addition, if the hold is stored in all of the hold storage areas 1 to 4, the overflow prize is not stored.

As described above, in the winning 1, the variation is executed in the state A even when the variation digestion is slow. If there is no state transition between the time of winning and the start of fluctuation, the look-ahead information (big hit determination result, fluctuation pattern, etc.) determined by winning is not different from the fluctuation information determined at the time of fluctuation starting. However, the winning 2 generated after the winning 1 or the 97th fluctuation start in the state A may be switched between the winning and the fluctuation start depending on the number of reserved balls when the winning occurs. .. When the number of balls to be held at the time of winning 2 is 3 and the winning 2 is stored in the holding storage 4 area as the fourth holding, even if the state is A at the time of winning, the state B is at the start of variation. Becomes In this case, the look-ahead information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of variation may differ from each other because the preconditions for various determinations are different. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous to the player than the state B, the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead information actually has a high-expectation effect, but actually the fluctuation is a low-expectation value. An event may occur that significantly discourages the player.

Therefore, depending on the number of reserved balls when a prize is generated, a period during which a state transition can occur between the winning state and the start of the variation, that is, the 100th variation ends after the 97th variation starts in the state A, and the state changes from the state A. Pre-reading is prohibited during the period until the transition to B. In this way, the pre-reading effect is not performed when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed becomes the predetermined period (here, the remaining number of times the state is maintained is 4 variations). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to execution of an excessive (deviation) look-ahead effect compared to the actual variation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

The state transition includes transition from a high-probability state to a normal probability state by exhausting ST times, transition from a short-time state to a non-short-time state by exhausting time-saving numbers, and state transition by transition of production mode according to the number of changes. To be When it is possible that the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the time of winning (pre-reading) and the start of variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the pre-reading determination and wins the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Only the number of reserved balls with special symbols corresponding to the starting opening and information without pre-reading are transmitted.

When the main control MPU 4100a performs the read-ahead prohibition control at the time of such a state transition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally grasps the remaining number of time saving when the power is cut off and the power is restored during the time saving state. Since this is not possible, it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect that was prohibited after power recovery. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Further, the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of fluctuations in the time saving state (time saving number), but the time saving information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information of the time saving state but cannot grasp the progress status of the time saving state (remaining number of time saving). Therefore, even if the prefetching effect is prohibited when the remaining number of shortening times before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes 4 times or less, the judgment cannot be made and the time saving state ends after the power restoration. I had no choice but to ban pre-reading. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform pre-reading determination when the number of remaining time-savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state is 4 times (predetermined number of times) or less, so that the pre-reading command necessary for the pre-reading effect is generated in the vicinity. It is not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform the prefetching effect. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the prefetching effect during the time saving state according to the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power is interrupted and the power is restored during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period during which the look-ahead effect is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the explanation of the variation distribution table information prefetch command (FIG. 74, FIG. 77 ), when the mode value is “03H”, the reach determination result indicates that the number of reserved balls varies between prefetch and variation start. It has been mentioned above that they can be different, ie the table that selects the variation patterns can change. Whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern may change depending on the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is predetermined, these values can be acquired by setting the variable allocation table information prefetch command by prefetch determination. In such a case, it may be a target for determining whether or not to perform the prefetching before performing the prefetching determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76). If either the reach or non-reach distribution table may be selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step 244).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold, and since each of them has a structure capable of holding and storing up to 4 pieces, the number of state maintenance before the transition (the number of games) is Although prefetching is prohibited when the remaining number of times is 4 or less, it is not limited to this. The number of determination thresholds (here, four times) may be changed according to the specifications applied to the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the control that does not execute the special figure prefetching determination performed on the main control board side described above may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetching effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special figure prefetching effect)]
Next, the control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 to prohibit the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

Although the special figure pre-reading prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described above, the pre-reading prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of a defect related to the pre-reading effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the main control MPU 4100a can recognize the power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot. When the hold is present at the time of the power interruption, the main control MPU 4100a transmits information on the number of reserved balls to the peripheral control board 4140, but the read-ahead information (result information, variation pattern, etc. Command contents) is not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the prefetching effect for the power-on-hold during the power-on hold. Further, although the prefetch information for the hold generated after the power restoration is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, there is a concern about execution of the lookahead effect of the hold generated after the power restoration until all the hold at the time of power interruption is exhausted.

For example, when the probability state after power restoration is a high probability state, and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold upon hitting a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch determination of the hold that has occurred after power restoration. Although it is executed in a high probability state, the probability state changes from a high probability state to a low probability state due to the variable execution of the corresponding pending. That is, it is a low-probability state when the hold generated after power restoration is exhausted. Therefore, even if the hold prefetch effect that occurs after power recovery is an effect with a high degree of expectation, the change effect of the hold may normally be a disappointing effect, which is a significant betrayal of the player's expectations. There is a risk that it may be less interesting.

Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetching effect even after receiving the special figure prefetching command until a predetermined number of times (eight times) of fluctuations are started after the power is turned on including the power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold. Further, as described above, even when the mode value of the received pre-reading variation distribution table information command is "03H", the pre-reading effect is prohibited. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the prefetching effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the first modification will be described.

Further, as a second modification, if there is an unknown hold (hold when power is cut off) when the power is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetching effect even if the special figure preread command is received until the unknown hold is exhausted. To do. In Modification 2, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the pre-reading special symbol 1(2) memory pre-reading command of "no pre-reading" regardless of the game state, the suspension of the command is treated as an unknown suspension, and similarly. , The look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted. Below, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84, the prefetching effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Modification 1 (predetermination of a predetermined number of fluctuations when power is turned on)]
First, modified example 1 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the first modification. The processes common to the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

As described above, in the received command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command in the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and the process according to the read command is executed.

In the first modification, when the read command is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the 8 variation prefetch prohibit flag after power-on and a flag corresponding to the other command ( (Step S1422), the received command analysis processing ends. After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (instruction of effect start and game state) to the peripheral control board 4140 according to the game backup information. Therefore, the command that the peripheral control board 4140 first receives after the power is turned on is the power-on state command.

When the read command is the special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch prohibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

Here, the prefetching prohibition count process will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-reading prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation display game has started to be executed eight times after the power is turned on even when the special-drawing pre-reading command is received.

First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the eight-variation prefetching prohibition flag is set after the input (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), "8" is set in the subtraction prefetch prohibition count provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). After that, the 8-variable post-reading prohibition flag is released after the input (step S1433). As a result, the setting of the read-ahead prohibition count is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.

If the eight-variation prefetching prohibition flag has not been set after the input (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU4150a proceeds to the process of step S1434 described later.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the prefetch prohibition count is "0" (step S1434). If the pre-reading prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1434), the pre-reading prohibition count is decremented by 1 and updated (step S1435), and the pre-reading prohibition count process is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetch prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count process is ended as it is.

It will be explained over time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes→step S1432→step S1433 is executed at the start of the first fluctuation, and the prefetch prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is set. After that, the process of No→step S1435 is executed in step S1434, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the start of the second variation, the process of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes "6". The same process is repeated at the start of the 3rd to 8th fluctuations, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes "0" at the start of the 8th fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the subsequent fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 →Yes in step S1434 is repeated.

As described above, in the pre-reading prohibition count process, the pre-reading prohibition count value and the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on are associated with each other so that the pre-reading prohibition count value can be determined. ..

Returning to FIG. 79. Peripheral control MPU4150a, the read command is special figure pre-reading effect command (pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command, pre-reading symbol type pre-reading command, pre-reading variation pattern pre-reading command, pre-reading variation type pre-reading command , The pre-reading variable distribution table information command) (Yes in step S1407), the ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) with the status value “69H” and the mode value “03H” as the special diagram pre-reading effect command. It is determined whether or not a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command indicating is received (step S1441). When the ambiguous command is received (Yes in step S1441), the prefetch effect is not executed, and thus the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not receive the ambiguous command, that is, when it receives the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the pre-reading prohibition count is set. It is determined whether it is "0" (step S1442). If the prefetching prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1442), the prefetching effect is not executed because the fluctuation has not started eight times after the power is turned on (the prefetching prohibition state). Therefore, the received command analysis process is ended as it is.

Further, when the prefetch prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs the execution of the prefetching effect because the start of the eight-time fluctuation after the power is turned on has ended. The figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis processing ends. When the special map prereading effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prereading effect in the special figure prereading effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

In this way, in the prefetching effect prohibition control of the modified example 1, after the power is turned on, the prefetching effect is not performed until the fluctuation start is performed a predetermined number of times, which is the upper limit number of holding. Therefore, the hold at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetch effect of the hold that occurs after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problems as described above, suppress a decrease in the interest of the game, and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. Moreover, since the predetermined number of times is set to the total upper limit number of holding of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, it is possible to permit the prefetching effect after the hold at the time of power interruption is surely exhausted (variation start).

Although the prefetching effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned problem occurs when the power is turned on by the power recovery from the power interruption. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing RAM clear on the main control board 4100. Although the main control board 4100 sends a command that distinguishes the two, the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the processing. However, prohibiting the look-ahead effect until the RAM is cleared, which does not cause a problem, may cause a decline in the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is cleared, and if the RAM is cleared, the prefetch effect may be permitted. In this way, by canceling the unnecessary look-ahead effect prohibition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

For example, when the probability state after power restoration is a high probability state, and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold upon hitting a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch determination of the hold that has occurred after power restoration. Although it is executed in a high probability state, the probability state changes from a high probability state to a low probability state due to the variable execution of the corresponding pending. That is, it is a low-probability state when the hold generated after power restoration is exhausted. Therefore, even if the hold prefetch effect that occurs after power recovery is an effect with a high degree of expectation, the change effect of the hold may normally be a disappointing effect, which is a significant betrayal of the player's expectations. There is a risk that it may be less interesting.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (preemption is prohibited until unknown is digested)]
Next, a modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis processing of the second modification. The processes common to the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure prefetch execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the second modification.

As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the pre-reading special symbol 1(2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the power-on hold (holding at the time of power interruption) of the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as "unknown hold" in which the prefetch information for executing the prefetch effect is unknown. Then, the prefetching effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted.

With reference to FIG. 81, the received command analysis process of the second modification will be described. First, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the read-only unknown flag (unknown flag) for unknown pending (unknown flag setting). The process is executed (step S1450). After that, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the unknown flag setting process at the time of insertion (step S1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the special 1 unknown count and the special 2 unknown count of the subtraction method provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the special figure 1 pending number (unknown pending number) and the special 2 pending number (unknown pending), respectively. Number) is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from the occurrence of power failure, the number of holdings at power failure will be set as power recovery information (backup game information).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special 1 unknown count is “0” (step S1452). If the special 1 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1452), the special 1 unknown flag indicating the prohibition of the prefetch effect of the special 1 suspension is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. To do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power interruption, or that the initial start is not at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the flag is not set and the process proceeds to step S1454.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is "0" (step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1454), the special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of the prefetch effect of the special 2 suspension is set (step S1455), and the unknown flag setting process at the time of insertion. To finish. On the other hand, when the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that the special 2 unknown hold does not exist at the time of power supply, or that the initial start is performed instead of the power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set, and the unknown flag setting process at the time of closing is completed.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) is performed based on the presence or absence of unknown pending for each special symbol according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power interruption, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting of the special symbol to be held at the time of the power interruption is performed.

Returning to FIG. 81.

Next, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is the special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the unknown count process (step S1460). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether or not the read-ahead prohibition is canceled (clearing the unknown flag) by digesting the unknown hold. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol of the fluctuation start target is subtracted to determine whether or not the unknown is held (release determination of the read-ahead production prohibition), and when the digest is exhausted, the unknown flag (pre-reading production prohibition) is released. ..

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the unknown flag of the variation start target special symbol is set (step S1461). Then, when the unknown flag of the target special map is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special map is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special map by 1 (step S1462), and updates the target feature after the update. It is determined whether the unknown count in the figure is "0" (step S1463). If the unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1463), the unknown count process is ended. On the other hand, when the unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process is ended.

In this way, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is exhausted (the number of holding balls when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating the presence or absence of the unknown hold When the value of is 0, the unknown flag is cleared. As a result, in the special diagram prefetching execution determination process (step S1470, FIG. 84 in FIG. 81) described later, it is possible to determine from the state of the unknown flag whether or not the prefetching is prohibited, and it is determined whether or not the pending prefetching effect has occurred. I am able to do so.

Returning to FIG. 81.

By the way, in the second modification, not only the suspension during power interruption, but also the suspension when the pre-read special symbol 1(2) storage pre-read command without pre-read is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as “unknown suspension”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) due to the occurrence of the unknown hold is not limited to when the power is turned on, but also when the hold (the game ball winning to the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102) occurs after the power is turned on. It is also performed when a command is received.

Peripheral control MPU4150a, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a pre-reading special symbol 1(2) storage pre-reading command that indicates the number of holding balls when the start mouth winning occurs and the presence or absence of the held pre-reading information ( If Yes in step S1469), the special drawing prefetch execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, setting the unknown flag for each special symbol (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of pre-reading information of the received command, or pre-reading effect execution according to the state of the pre-reading information and unknown flag Set flags.

Here, the details of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 84. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether the received pre-read special symbol 1(2) storage pre-read command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is the special symbol 1 (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether the command is “preread” (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the head of the mode value of the received special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at prefetch is "1".

And peripheral control MPU4150a, when the pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command received is not "pre-read" (No in step S1472a), other pre-read commands (pre-read symbol type pre-read command, pre-read variation pattern) The pre-reading command, pre-reading variation type pre-reading command, pre-reading variation distribution table information command) is an unknown pending state that is not transmitted from the main control board 4100, so a special 1 unknown flag for prohibiting special 1 pre-reading effect is set (step S1473a), At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at prefetch is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special symbol prefetch execution determination process is ended. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the setting state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the process of rewriting the special 1 unknown count value to the new value of the reserved number of balls in the process of step S1474a. To do. It is updated so that the use of new unknown reservations in the memory order is always a condition for canceling the look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, when the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is "pre-read", the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits other pre-read commands from the main control board 4100 when the pre-read command is "Yes" in step S1472a. Then, it is determined whether or not "6903H" (ambiguous command) is received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification. When the ambiguous command is received, that is, when the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of "6903H" is received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure pre-reading execution determination process ends.

If the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of the mode value other than "03H" (No in step S1475a), It is determined whether the 1-unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unclear flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special 1 prefetching effect execution is prohibited, and thus the special map prefetching execution determination process is ended.

Further, when the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in the special 1 prefetching effect execution permission, so the special figure prereading effect execution for instructing execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is performed. The flag is set (step S1477a), and the special figure prefetching execution determination processing ends. When the special map prereading effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prereading effect in the special figure prereading effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

In the process of step S1471, the received pre-read special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command does not target the special symbol 1, that is, if the command is the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471) The process of steps S1472b to S1477b executed is that the target is changed to the special symbol 2 from the process of steps S1472a to S1477a for the special symbol 1 described above.

In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-fetching is received, the unknown flag of the special symbol of the target is set, and the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted until the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted. Look-ahead production of special symbols is prohibited. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command with pre-reading is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Further, even when the received pre-reading variation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the pre-reading effect is not executed.

As described above, in the prefetching effect prohibition control of the second modification, the hold at the time of power interruption received as power restoration information when the power is turned on is set to “unknown hold”, and the prefetching effect is not executed even when the power is restored. Also, if there is an unknown hold (that is, if the prefetch information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU4150a has a hold that cannot specify the prefetch determination result), the special symbol that is the target until the unknown hold is digested The look-ahead effect is not performed. Then, if the unknown hold is exhausted, the prefetching effect is permitted. For this reason, the hold (unknown hold) at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetch effect after power recovery. In addition, since the pre-reading effect prohibition period is set for each special symbol in accordance with the number of unknown holdings, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the prefetching effect and a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) memory pre-reading command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set as “unknown hold”, and the pre-reading in the target special symbol is completed until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing this pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading judgment prohibition control at the time of the state transition by the main control board 4100, a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, at the time of shifting from the time saving state to the non-time saving state at the time of the above-described state transition, when the number of times the time saving state is maintained becomes 4 fluctuations or less, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination. Therefore, the special symbol 2 hold that occurs during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an unknown hold. Therefore, until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of 4) that occurs during the time saving state of the remaining 4 changes is exhausted, the prefetch effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-time saving state after the state transition. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the special symbol 2 priority digestion, after the state transition, the special symbol 2 of unknown pending is digested before the special symbol 1. In this way, the main control board 4100 does not target the hold that occurred during the four changes immediately before the transition state, and the peripheral control board 4140 also receives the hold capable of prefetching until the hold is exhausted. Also, by not targeting the prefetching effect, it is possible to reliably prohibit the execution of the prefetching effect during a period in which a problem is likely to occur. In addition, the hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, the pre-reading effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, and therefore is for the special symbol 2 being held. Therefore, the pre-reading effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state is not hindered.

Further, in Modification 2, the prefetching effect prohibition control for the unknown hold other than the hold during power interruption is performed at the timing when the number of hold changes. Specifically, the read-ahead effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving the read-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage read-ahead command (unknown command) without read-ahead, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is digested and starts changing. It will be canceled at the timing. In this way, the prefetch effect is prohibited when the unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, and the prefetch effect is permitted at the same time when the last unknown hold is exhausted. Therefore, more accurate prefetching effect prohibition control can be executed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the prefetching effect and the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as described in the modified example 1, the prefetching effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power may not be targeted at the time of clearing the RAM. In this case, a judgment process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-mentioned unknown-on-addition flag setting process (FIG. 82), and thereafter, when the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared). The unknown flag setting process at the time of input may be terminated without executing the process of. Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150cac in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. In this way, when the RAM is cleared, by controlling so as to allow the prefetching effect, it is possible to eliminate an unnecessary prohibition of the prefetching effect, suppress a decrease in the entertainment of the game, and provide an appropriate prefetching effect. ..

In Modifications 1 and 2, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading variable allocation table information command with a mode value “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach allocation table) is received for the occurrence of the pre-reading pending. If not, it is not the target of the prefetching effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the prefetch effect may be prohibited when the non-specific hit (small hit) is generated in the high probability state. Specifically, in the above-mentioned special drawing pre-reading execution determination process (FIG. 84), when a pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command with pre-reading is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H )) the symbol type prefetch command (status value "66H") is determined whether it is received, and the process of determining whether the current probability state is a high probability state when received If the command is received and the high probability state is received, the processes of steps S1473a and S1474a may be executed. Here, in the pre-reading stage, the main control board 4100 does not transmit the small hit type information to the peripheral control board 4140. Some of the small hit types return high probability states to low probability states (normal probability states). If the look-ahead effect is performed even after the small-hit hold that triggers the transition to such a low-probability state occurs, it occurs after the small-hit hold and becomes a big-hit judgment during the pre-reading in the high-probability state. It is possible that an event that causes a deviation determination at the start of fluctuation in the low probability state in which the holding is shifted with the small hit as a trigger. At this time, if the hit confirmation effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the actual variation result (disappearance) not only discourages the player's expectation, but also may cause a distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if the pre-reading command with pre-reading is received, if the symbol type pre-reading command "6650H" for the small hit is received in the high probability state, the result of the small hit is determined at the start of fluctuation (holding digestion). ) Prohibit look-ahead production. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game and a distrust of the player's effect due to the execution of an excessive (wrong) look-ahead effect with respect to the actual variation result, and the look-ahead effect. Can increase the reliability of.

[19-2-3. Big hit game start (prefetch information clear)]
By the way, the hold that occurs during the big hit is prohibited by the main control MPU4100a because the look-ahead determination is not executed, but the hold that has already been generated and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. The peripheral control MPU 4150a has pre-reading information based on the pre-reading determination, and can perform pre-reading effect. However, the game state after the big hit, which is digested (change start) at the start of the big hit, may be different from the game state at the time of pre-reading determination (the change pattern table is different). On the other hand, there is a possibility that an appropriate look-ahead effect may not be obtained. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 regarding the hold at the start of the big hit, while clearing the look-ahead effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in which an appropriate look-ahead presentation is not performed. The control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described below with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-described effect control process (FIG. 49).

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes the big hit opening display process in response to the big hit start command (step S1710). Next, a big hit display process is performed to display that the big winning opening 2003 is open on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and to perform a display effect during a big hit game state (for example, round display) (step). S1720). After that, a big hit ending display process for effecting the end of the big hit game state is executed (step S1730), the process selection flag is updated to "0" (step S1740), and the big hit display process is ended.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit opening display process. The big hit opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the big hit display process (FIG. 85) described above.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the big hit opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the processing of step S1411 of the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 48) described above. Then, if the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process ends.

On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c to generate the presentation information (preliminary information) corresponding to the prefetch command. The notification mode) is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 is set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Performing production control. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a, a function (preliminary notification mode specifiable setting means) for setting prefetching effect information (preliminary notification mode) to be able to be specified in a predetermined storage area, and the prior notification mode on the condition that the big hit game is executed. It also has a function of setting unspecified (preliminary notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information that is cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets again the effect information corresponding to the prefetch command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table which are switched by the big hit this time (step S1713). ..

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes the display setting process for setting the opening display such as the fanfare effect (step S1715), and then ends the big hit opening display process. After that, when the big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit medium display process (step S1720 of FIG. 85) is executed.

In this way, in the big hit opening display process, the effect display showing the start of the big hit is performed, and the prefetching effect information of the hold stored at the start of the big hit is changed from that according to the game state when the hold occurs to the big hit game state. It can be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the prefetching effect information selected under the normal probability state when the hold occurs, and re-reads the prefetching effect information again under the high probability state that is switched by the big hit. Select again. Further, the target of the effect information clear processing of step S1712 is the prefetch effect information, and the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 (the number of reserved balls, the presence or absence of the preread, the pattern type, the variation pattern, the variation type). , Distribution table) is held, so it is possible to reset the effect information based on the hold information in the effect information setting process of the next step S1713. The reset timing is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it may be reset before the big hit round finalization effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect according to the situation with respect to the hold at the start of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the pre-reading effect and amusement of the game.

Note that the target of the above-described effect information clear processing (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Even if the special symbol 1 (2) memory prefetch command with prefetch is received from the main control board 4100 and other prefetch commands are received, an abnormal change in the number of holdings (holding when receiving last time) If the number of pieces of held information received this time has increased to four even though the number of pieces of information was 0), the held effect information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when the hold is satisfied is the target of the effect information clear processing (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance the trouble of the read-ahead effect for the hold, and to perform a proper read-ahead. It leads to the provision of production.

The control that does not execute the special figure prefetching effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be the control that does not perform the special figure prefetching determination on the main control board side.

[20. Production mode transition]
By the way, in the received command analysis process (FIGS. 48, 79, 81), when the command read in the process of step S1402 is the special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404. The variable pattern reception flag is set by the processing of. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting the special figure synchronization effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state among a plurality of, the effect pattern (decorative pattern of the decorative symbol, the type of reach effect, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern and the winning information received from the main control board 4100. Whether or not to execute the notice effect, the notice effect mode, the presence or absence of the extension effect, etc.) are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronization effect.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 87, an example of the effect transition in the probable variation time saving state in which the number of times saving is given 64 times will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect transition in the probability-changing time saving state. When the game state enters a sudden change time saving state, the special figure synchronization effect (time saving effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of the time saving number, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode after 31 times of the time saving number. Entrainment effect (probability change confirmation effect) is executed. In the special figure entrainment effect of the specific A effect mode, continuous effect of whether or not the time-saving state is continued is executed when the number of time saving times is 10, 20, and 30 times, and normal effect is executed in other changes. To be done.

At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of times saved, and sets a variation pattern (normal effect pattern, continuous effect pattern, probability variation confirmation effect pattern) according to the number of times saved as the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables according to the number of times saved (the number of times the lottery game is executed in the time saved state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of times saved. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 87, in the probability variation time saving state, the variation patterns which are 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times are selected from the table in which the normal effect pattern is set, and the time saving number is 10 times. , 20 times and 30 times the variation patterns are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the variation patterns after the time saving number 31 times are selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmation effect pattern is set. Further, the continuous effect pattern includes a success effect pattern in which the time saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time saving state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of shortening times (the number of times of variation) by following the received variation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of shortening times (the number of variations). As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as at the time of power interruption. The effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 87, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the time saving number is 1 to 30 times, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the time saving number 31 times.

In the following, with reference to FIG. 88, not only the determination of the effect but also the effect mode transfer, which is executed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, will be described.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when the variation pattern command transmitted at the time of the variation start is received from the main control board 4100 in the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46) described above. It should be noted that the transition of the effect mode is, for example, the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 87 to the specific B effect mode.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a transitional condition to the specific B effect mode that is a time saving state, continuous effect (success or failure) is executed every predetermined number of times, and continuous success effect is executed three times. It is a production mode. Peripheral control MPU4150a, when it is not the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), ends the effect mode transition processing.

When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variable pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern from the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not (step S1752). When the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process ends.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update has become 3 (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). After that, the production mode transition processing ends. The count of the number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared when the special A effect mode ends.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving the specific variation pattern command of the predetermined number of times from the main control MPU 4100a, and according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a, the specific game state (here, the time saving state). It is possible to appropriately determine the transitional effects (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in the series of effect modes (specific A effect mode) without knowing the number of fluctuations in (). The peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on the command received from the main control board 4100 side where the game information is always backed up, so that even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared at the time of power interruption, it is restored. It is possible to execute the appropriate effect when the power is turned on.

[21. Switching control of special map prefetching effect]
Here, when a special start expectation of a big hit occurs while the special map pre-reading effect is being executed, the special figure pre-reading effect that was executed in advance is newly generated. The control for switching (overwriting) to the special figure prefetching effect based on will be described. It should be noted that description of contents overlapping with those of the above description is omitted.

[21-1. Control on main control board side (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)]
As described in the memory pre-reading process (FIG. 24), in the present embodiment, if the pre-reading determination prohibition period is not set when the game ball starts winning, the command (special symbol) necessary to execute the special-drawing pre-reading effect Send a command to specify the number of holdings, special pattern variation pattern command, etc.). Even when performing the switching control of the special figure prefetching effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the special figure prefetching effect can be executed by determining whether or not it is the prefetching determination prohibition period, as in the storage prefetching process shown in FIG. A command necessary for executing the special figure prefetching effect is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. As described above, the main control board 4100 serves as a first look-ahead determination unit that first determines whether or not to execute the special map look-ahead effect after the start winning.

[21-2. Peripheral control board side control (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)]
When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the command for executing the special figure prefetching effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 executes the special figure prefetching effect based on the content of the command and the execution state of the special figure prefetching effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the special figure prefetching effect that suggests high expectation of starting memory, such as the normal prefetching effect that changes the hold display, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Special figure pre-reading effects such as changing the background (background pre-reading effect) and causing a character to appear independently of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (character pre-reading effect) can be executed. The background prefetch effect does not have to execute the effect by explicitly displaying a specific hold display, and one of the currently held starting memories (which may include the starting memory being executed) is highly expected to be a big hit. May be shown. In the present embodiment, a background pre-reading effect that changes the background is executed together with the pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect, continuous pre-reading effect, collectively referred to as "holding pre-reading effect") that changes the hold display of the pre-reading target. An example of the background prefetching effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95.

Next, the control by the peripheral control board 4140 for executing the special figure prefetching effect will be described. Specifically, the special figure prefetching effect setting process for setting the special figure prefetching effect will be described. Other processes are the same as the processes described so far.

[21-2-1. Special map prefetching effect control processing (switching control of special figure prefetching effect)]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure prefetching effect control processing including switching control of special figure prefetching effect of the present embodiment. This process is a process executed in step S1027 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42), like the special figure prefetching effect control process shown in FIG. 66.

In the special figure prefetching effect control processing including the switching control of the special figure prefetching effect, the processing for executing the normal prefetching effect for changing the hold display shown in FIG. 66 and the display mode of the hold display can be changed for each variable display. In addition to the process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect, a process for executing the background prefetching effect is included. In the process for executing the background prefetching effect, it is possible to switch (overwrite) the background prefetching effect that was previously executed to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory. Hereinafter, a specific procedure will be described, but description of processing common to the flowchart shown in FIG. 66 will be appropriately omitted.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 of FIG. 42) when the prefetching effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 of FIG. 48). If the special map prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the special figure prefetching effect is not executed, so the special figure prefetching effect control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program reads the pre-reading effect based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the starting memory of the pre-reading target. The type and mode of the effect are selected (step S2020). Specifically, either the normal look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display of the starting memory or the background look-ahead effect that changes the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected, and the selected feature is selected. An effect mode of the diagram prefetch effect is determined.

Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal look-ahead effect is selected (step S2021). When the normal look-ahead effect is selected (the result of step S2021 is “Yes”), the processing of step S2005 and subsequent steps is executed. The processing after step S2005 is as described in FIG. 66. The timing for clearing the special map prefetch effect execution flag is different from the processing shown in FIG. 66.

On the other hand, if the normal prefetch effect is not selected (result of step S2021 is “No”), that is, if the background prefetch effect is selected, the effect control program actually executes the background prefetch effect. It is determined (step S2022). Whether or not the background prefetch effect is actually executed is determined by, for example, whether or not the expectation of the variation pattern corresponding to the starting memory is equal to or higher than the predetermined expectation. Further, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect may be selected by lottery, such as facilitating execution of the special figure prefetching effect when the degree of expectation is high.

Although the special figure prefetching effect can be basically executed in all the variation patterns, the allocation of the lottery data for determining whether or not the special pattern prefetching effect can be executed is changed according to the variation pattern. For example, in the case of a normal deviation change, the winning (execution) probability of the hold prefetching effect is 1/100 (99/100 deviation), whereas in the normal reach 25/100 (75/100 deviation), super reach It is determined based on a lottery table that is set to be 50/100 (the deviation is 50/100) in the case of failure and 99/100 (the deviation is 1/100) in the case of per-reach.

Furthermore, the actual production mode (scenario) is determined based on a table in which another scenario table is associated with the number of times the production is executed. For example, when the number of presentations is two, a table in which the probability of lottery is set for each scenario is provided. In addition, the contents of the effect of the scenario selected according to the scenario table, the number of scenarios, and the lottery probability are different.

FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining a relationship between a scenario and a variation pattern in which the color of the hold display changes when the number of times of the special figure prereading effect (holding prereading effect) is two. The scenarios are, for example, scenario 1 (blue→blue), scenario 2 (blue→green), scenario 3 (blue→red), and scenario 4 (red→gold). It will be a high-performance pre-reading of special maps. Note that scenario 4 is set to be drawn only during a big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to a big hit. Further, the number of continuous effects is not limited to two, and may be, for example, three or more times, and a table showing correspondence between scenarios and variation patterns may be prepared according to the number of continuous effects.

In the present embodiment, the scenario to be executed is determined based on the table in which the scenario lottery probability is set. In addition to the variation pattern, in the case of a big hit, a scenario lottery table may be provided according to the type of the big hit. In addition, when the variation pattern and the big hit symbol are uniquely determined, only the table based on the variation pattern is required, and it is not necessary to provide the table determined by the big hit type.

Further, the special figure prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) for changing the hold display is not limited, and the background prefetching effect similarly includes a lottery table and a scenario table. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the scenario and the variation pattern when the number of times of the background prefetching effect is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario A (light cloud→light cloud), scenario B (light cloud→rain cloud), scenario C (rain cloud→thunder cloud), and scenario D (rain cloud→clear). It will be a high-performance pre-reading of special maps. The scenario D is set to be drawn only during the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous effects is not limited to two, and may be, for example, three or more times, and a table showing correspondence between scenarios and variation patterns may be prepared according to the number of continuous effects.

When the background prefetch effect is not executed (the result of step S2022 is “No”), the effect control program clears the special figure prefetch effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, when the background prefetch effect is executed (the result of step S2022 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the background prefetch effect is currently executed (step S2023). To determine whether or not the background prefetching effect is being executed, for example, a flag is set at the timing when the execution of the background prefetching effect is started (or determined/selected), and the timing when the background prefetching effect is ended (for example, the background prefetching effect). A flag that clears at the time when the variable display based on the starting memory for executing the effect starts (ends) is provided, and the flag may be set based on the value set in this flag.

As an example of the flag, a flag (prefetching expectation flag) may be prepared for each expectation of the prefetching effect mode (holding prefetching or background prefetching). For example, when the expectation to be a big hit varies depending on the mode of production, such as high/medium/low, a look-ahead expectation flag corresponding to each expectation is prepared (for example, a high-anticipation look-ahead notice flag, Like the medium-expectation look-ahead flag, the low-expectation look-ahead flag). Furthermore, instead of dividing the flags according to the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be divided according to the information set in one flag (for example, when the value of the flag is "1", the degree of expectation is low, When it is "2", it is medium expectation, and when it is "3", it is high expectation.) These examples are merely examples, and the degree of expectation need not be limited to three types, and may be three or more types or only two types. That is, it suffices that the pre-reading effect mode (background pre-reading) can be determined (determined) according to the degree of expectation.

In addition, when the pre-reading expectation flag is provided, the pre-reading expectation flag of the special map pre-reading effect being executed when the special map pre-reading effect is switched is held and compared with the flag of the special figure pre-reading effect to be newly executed. do it. For example, if the pre-reading expectation flag of the special map pre-reading effect that is being executed is in the expectation level, if the pre-reading expectation flag of the special map pre-reading effect to be newly executed is high in the expectation level, the new special map pre-reading effect Switch. Information (numerical value information or the like) set for each of the above-described scenarios may be used as the flag of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed.

When the background prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether to switch the background prefetching effect being executed to the background prefetching effect to be newly executed. (Step S2024).

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the background prefetch effect to be newly executed is compared with the degree of expectation of the background prefetch effect being executed, and the background prefetch effect is set when the background prefetch effect to be newly executed has a higher degree of expectation. Switch. The "expectation degree" is basically the expectation degree that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit, but may be the expectation degree of the kind (symbol) of the big hit or the expectation degree of the gaming state after the big hit. Further, instead of the result of the variable display of the special symbols, the degree of expectation as the effect (for example, normally out, normal reach, SP reach, etc.) may be included. For example, a variation pattern may be specified from the variation pattern prefetch command, and determination may be made based on the variation pattern. Specifically, "expectation level" may be added to the item of the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) to previously define the expectation level for each variation pattern, or the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach) to be executed. Etc.) may be used to set the degree of expectation. Further, since a reach effect having a high degree of expectation such as SP reach has a long variation time, it may be determined that the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation degree. If the expectations are the same, any starting memory may be prioritized and may be determined by lottery. When both are big hits, the special map prefetch effect cannot be executed during the big hit game, so the special figure preread effect being executed is prioritized.

Further, in the case where the player can obtain a great profit as in the case of both big hits, it may be possible to switch to a special look-ahead effect display mode that does not appear in a single look-ahead lottery. The expectation level does not have to be limited to the big hit, and the expectation level may be divided according to the type of the big hit. For example, the number of rounds of a big hit game, the probability of winning a special lottery after a big hit, the number of times a game state (probably changed state, time saving state) is advantageous for the player You may divide an expectation degree according to a game state.

Furthermore, priority may be set for each determined scenario, and determination may be made based on the priority set for each scenario. For example, numerical information is set for each scenario, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the degree of expectation. When the scenario information is set and stored in the RAM, since it is stored as numerical information, it becomes possible to express the level of expectation by the value itself. The numerical information corresponds to, for example, information (numerical value) for determining the rendering mode and information (numerical value) indicating the degree of expectation, and the numerical information may be set based on these pieces of information. In this case, by holding the numerical information of the scenario until the special figure prefetching effect is finished and comparing it with the numerical information corresponding to the scenario of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed, it is determined whether or not to switch the special figure prefetching effect. Just make a decision.

The production control program clears the special figure pre-reading production execution flag (step S2027) when the background pre-reading production being executed is not continuously switched to a new background pre-reading production (the result of step S2024 is “No”). , This process ends. In this case, the special figure pre-reading effect being executed is continuously executed without interruption.

On the other hand, when the background prefetch effect being executed is switched to the new background prefetch effect (result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the setting information of the background prefetch effect being executed to the new background prefetch effect. Initialization is performed to execute (step S2025). The setting information of the background prefetching effect is initialized even when the background prefetching effect that is being executed is executed to the end. The timing of initializing the setting information is, for example, the timing at which the starting memory related to the background prefetch effect being executed is consumed.

The production control program initializes the setting information of the background prefetching effect being executed (step S2025), or when the background prefetching effect is not being executed (the result of step S2023 is “No”), the background prefetching effect. A setting process is executed (step S2026). Since it is not possible to execute a plurality of background prefetch effects in parallel, the background prefetch effect setting processing may unconditionally initialize the setting information of the background prefetch effects. Finally, the effect control program clears the special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this processing.

In the process of step S2025, the setting information of the background prefetch effect being executed is not initialized and a new background prefetch effect is not executed, but a new background prefetch effect is continuously executed to the background prefetch effect being executed. You may do so. At this time, the player may be able to recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), or may not be recognized (difficult to recognize). For example, if the player cannot recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), he/she feels that the high expectation state has continued for a long time, so that the expectation can be maintained for a long time. At this time, the state of high expectation is maintained even after the variation display of the starting memory corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect that was originally executed is out of order, and further, in the variation display executed later, the degree of expectation is higher. Since the effect based on the variation pattern is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

In addition, when the special map prefetching effect is switched, an effect for notifying the switching may be executed. For example, the player may be able to recognize by performing an effect (display, sound, light emission, driving body, etc.) that is not executed in the normal effect when switching the special figure prefetch effect. Furthermore, you may perform the effect which suggests that a special figure prefetching effect switching will generate|occur|produce. In this case, instead of executing the effect at the start of fluctuation after it is determined that the special figure prefetching effect is switched, even if the switching occurs, the special figure prefetching effect that is being executed is still being executed. Perform a production that can recognize the pre-reading production (screen flash, different colors only around the display screen, change the decorative pattern itself (color, shape), subliminal production, etc.) It is sufficient that the effect is such that it can be recognized that the effect switching has occurred.

In the present embodiment, the normal prefetching effect can be executed in parallel for a plurality of starting memories, but the background prefetching effect cannot be executed in parallel. Therefore, the process of step S2021 may determine whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed in parallel, not whether or not the normal prefetching effect is executed. For example, the pre-reading effect that can be executed in parallel is the first group, the pre-reading effect that cannot be executed in parallel is the second group, and the pre-reading effect selected in the process of step S2020 belongs to the first group or the second group. The processing may be branched depending on whether it belongs to a group. Note that even pre-reading effects that can be executed in parallel may be switched (overwritten) to the pre-reading effect that is currently being executed based on the newly generated start memory.

Further, the background prefetch effect and the normal prefetch effect (holding prefetch effect) may be executed at the same time. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure pre-reading effect control processing capable of simultaneously executing the background pre-reading effect and the normal pre-reading effect (holding pre-reading effect).

When the background prefetching effect and the hold prefetching effect are simultaneously executed, the normal prefetching effect, the background prefetching effect, or both of them can be selected in the process of step S2020. This point is different from the process of step S2020 of the special figure prefetching effect control process shown in FIG. 89. Furthermore, the process of step S2021 of FIG. 89 is deleted, and after the setting process of the hold prefetching effect is completed, the setting process of the background prefetching effect is executed. That is, after the processing of step S2011, the processing of steps S2022 to 2026 may be executed.

In addition, a plurality of normal prefetch effects may be executed in parallel only in a specific state. For example, a plurality of normal lookahead effects may be executed in parallel only when the expectation level of the normal lookahead effect that is executed in advance is lower than that of the newly executed normal lookahead effect.

In addition, the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the received special symbol hold command and the current game state stored on the peripheral board side (the game state here is limited to the probability change and the time saving). First, based on the consistency with changing, reach, big hit (opening, ending, big winning opening, etc.) It may be determined whether to execute the special map prefetching effect. When giving priority to the special symbol hold command, regardless of the game state, priority is given to the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the special symbol hold command is given, and the game state (probability state or special figure look-ahead effect during execution) Etc.), the special symbol prefetch effect may not be executed even if the special symbol hold command includes information that permits execution of the special symbol prefetch effect.

If the special symbol hold command does not execute the special symbol pre-reading effect even if the special symbol pre-reading effect is included in the information, for example, a dedicated pre-reading lottery table (mismatch exclusive table) is provided. Whether or not to execute the special map prefetching effect may be selected by lot based on the mismatch-only table. At this time, in this mismatch-only table, the probability of selecting a scenario to be returned to the normal mode (a state in which the special map prefetch effect is not executed) is set to be high, and the expectation level is gradually decreased in addition. As described above, the effect mode is changed, or an effect that is not executed in the normal special map lookahead effect is executed. If the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the special symbol suspension command is executable does not match the current game state stored on the peripheral board side, do not mislead the player. Alternatively, the normal presentation mode may be forcibly returned.

If the information indicating whether or not the special symbol prefetch effect included in the received special symbol hold command and the game state do not match, there is a possibility of a malfunction such as a program bug or electrostatic noise. For this reason, it is possible to make it easier to detect the occurrence of an abnormality by executing an effect that cannot be executed in normal times, rather than simply controlling not to execute the special figure prefetch effect. It can be useful for inspection of gaming machines such as.

As described above, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether the special control pre-reading effect can be executed by the main control control board 4100 (first pre-reading determination means), and then, based on the game state or other starting memory, the special control. It constitutes a second pre-reading determination means capable of judging whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed and the effect contents.

[21-3. Performance example]
Next, a specific example of special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) executed by the control described above will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) in the present embodiment. The special figure pre-reading effect described in FIG. 93 is a background pre-reading effect in which the background changes, and the background can be further changed at a predetermined timing according to the degree of expectation. Hereinafter, a specific example of the background prefetching effect will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

FIG. 93(A) shows the state before the background prefetch effect is executed, and shows the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends and the special symbol is fixed. In the state shown in FIG. 93(A), the starting memory for the special symbol 1 is reserved for four.

After the stop of the special symbol, the pending starting memory is consumed, and the variable display of the special symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the state where the background prefetching effect has been started is shown. At this time, the starting memory to be the background prefetch effect is any of the three starting memories that are held. The player may be able to specify the starting memory that is the target of the special figure pre-reading effect at the timing when the background pre-reading effect is started, or notify at the timing when the starting memory that is the target of the background pre-reading effect is consumed. You may do so. If a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation is selected in the starting memory that is the target of the background look-ahead effect, the variation is a background look-ahead effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern (for example, when the reach occurs). The player can know what is the target.

In the background prefetching effect of this embodiment, clouds appear in the background. Further, the background change due to the background prefetching effect is configured to proceed in a stepwise manner, and the appearing cloud changes in a stepwise manner. The pattern in which the background (cloud) changes may be determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 93(C)), the suspended starting memory is exhausted, and when the next variation is started, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the cloud As the color becomes darker, it changes to a rain cloud. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), it changes into a thundercloud, and further thunder is generated to cause a big storm. At this time, the hold display is reduced or hidden as the reach occurs. In this embodiment, the darker the cloud, the higher the degree of expectation, and the highest degree of expectation when a thundercloud occurs, but as a special effect (for example, a big hit confirmation), the cloud disappears and the sun appears. (FIG. 93(F)).

In addition, the timing when the background first changes may be the timing when the game ball wins the starting winning opening (upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102), or may be the time when the variation of the decorative symbol starts. In the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative pattern is started, and even if a plurality of starting openings are won in a predetermined state (for example, a normal gaming state), the display is made so that the winnings of the plurality of starting openings can be determined. However, in a state different from the predetermined state, even if multiple winning openings are won, it is difficult or impossible to distinguish the winnings from the multiple starting openings. By starting a plurality of game balls while playing, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which expectation of starting memory is high.

In addition, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), there is a certain grace period until the fluctuation starts after the start memory having a high expectation occurs, and a plurality of execution timings of the background prefetching effect are set. If possible, the background prefetch effect may be started after a certain period of time has elapsed. For example, with respect to the special figure prefetching effect that occurs when the number of holdings is three or more, no effect may be executed when holding 1 and holding 2 are exhausted, and the special figure prefetching effect may be started at the timing when holding 3 is exhausted. In this case, a scenario such as “no change→no change→prefetch A” may be set as the scenario for special figure prefetching effect, and lottery may be performed for each variation. In the case of lottery for each change, as described above, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing by preventing the fall.

With the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting memory that is the target of the special map prefetching effect, and all the fluctuations that are executed before the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern with high expectation is started. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the display and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the timing at which the background changes stepwise may be changed each time the variation of the decorative design is started, or may be changed every predetermined time regardless of the variation start timing of the decorative design. This makes it possible to change the background in a plurality of stages even when the number of starting memories to be exhausted in advance is small. In addition, when a reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect may be executed in parallel with the background look-ahead effect, or the background look-ahead effect may be stopped and the reach effect may be executed.

Then, when a new start memory with a high expectation of a big hit occurs while the background look-ahead effect is being executed, the background look-ahead effect executed in advance is based on the newly-generated start memory. An example of effects when switching (overwriting) to the background prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the special map prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) being executed is switched to the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory.

Similar to FIG. 93(A), FIG. 94(A) shows a state before the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) is executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends. , Shows the time when the design is fixed. Starting memory of special symbol 1 is reserved for four.

Further, FIG. 94(B) shows a state in which, similarly to FIG. 93(B), the suspended starting memory is newly digested to start the variable display of the special symbol and the background prefetching effect is started. .. Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative design is stopped (FIG. 94(C)), the pending starting memory is consumed to start the variation of the decorative design and the background is gradually changed (FIG. 94(D)), The variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 94(E)). At this time, the background may be changed independently of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 94(E), two game balls newly enter the starting winning opening during the variable display of the special symbol, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 again. When the background prefetch effect started in FIG. 94(B), that is, the expectation level of the newly generated starting memory is higher than the expectation level of the background prefetch effect being executed, it is being executed. The background prefetch effect is interrupted, and the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated starting memory is executed.

For example, during the execution of the special map prefetching effect, a lottery of the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory may be possible. This lottery may be possible at all times, or a specific condition (for example, the contents of the pre-reading effect that is currently being produced, the variation content of the decorative design or the stop design, and whether or not the lottery can be selected by random number lottery) is satisfied. May be possible by When the special figure prefetching effect lottery based on the newly generated starting memory is won, the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect is determined. When the determined display mode is compared with the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect being executed, and the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory is a higher-expected display mode effect. At a predetermined timing (the next change start, reach occurrence, symbol stop, etc.), the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed is switched and executed. When the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed is lower than the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect being executed, switching to the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed. Instead, the display mode of the special map prefetch effect being executed may be continued, or the special figure prefetch effect being executed may be stopped.

In the background prefetching effect of the present embodiment, the rendering mode is related to "weather", but the newly executed special figure prefetching rendering may not be directly related to "weather". For example, when the special figure prefetching effect being executed is related to "weather", the content of the subsequent special figure prefetching effect may be related to a car race. By executing the special map pre-reading effect related to the special figure pre-reading effect that is being executed, the player can feel as if a series of scenarios are being executed, and make the pre-reading effect period extended. it can.

Also, in the newly executed special map pre-reading effect scenario, the special figure pre-reading effect scenario that is being executed is compared, and in particular, the special figure pre-reading effect scenario that is being executed is combined with these scenarios from the progress status. New scenarios may be combined. For example, when the scenario of the special map look-ahead effect being executed is "cloudy → rain cloud → cumulonimbus" and the subsequent special map look-ahead effect scenario is "light cloudy → snow cloud → big storm" (the expectation for a big hit is light cloudy <cloudy cloud <cumulative cloud <we call it a big storm), by switching to the scenario of the subsequent special map pre-reading effect when the display mode of the special map pre-reading effect being executed is "rain cloud", the overall flow of the pre-reading effect mode is →Rain clouds→Light cloudiness→Thunder clouds→Large storm”, and the degree of expectation is temporarily lowered at the time of switching, but the degree of expectation once lowered in the subsequent display mode becomes higher. In this case, by preparing a scenario that changes in the order of “cloudy cloud → rain cloud → light cloud” as a special figure look-ahead effect of false (gaseous), the “thunder cloud” that appears after the light cloud causes the player to hit the jackpot. Expectations can be increased.

In addition, when executing the special figure prefetching effect of a scenario that is not related as the subsequent special figure prefetching effect scenario, it is possible to indicate to the player that a new start memory with a high degree of expectation has occurred. Even if the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect is out of order, the player's expectation can be maintained until the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect based on the subsequent starting memory is known.

FIG. 94(F) shows a state in which the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the color of the cloud changes so as to become dark, and as shown in FIG. 94(H), lightning appears from the cloud that is further blackened.

Note that in FIG. 94(F), the cloud color is lighter than in FIG. 94(E), and the background prefetching effect has returned to the previous stage. In this way, when the progress of the background prefetching effect has returned to the previous stage, the player can recognize that the starting memory with a higher degree of expectation has been added, and the sense of expectation can be further enhanced. .. It should be noted that an effect mode is preset as a scenario for the effect of the change of the clouds, and a plurality of scenarios may be combined, or a combined scenario may be prepared in advance.

On the other hand, the subsequent background prefetch effect may be started so as to continue the interrupted background prefetch effect without returning the progress of the background prefetch effect to the previous stage. By controlling in this way, the player can maintain a state where the expectation of a big hit continues for a longer time.

Reach also occurs in the variable display corresponding to the interrupted background prefetch effect, but in this case, the reach effect is executed and the background prefetch effect is continuously executed even after the next variable display is started. do it.

It should be noted that the special map prefetch effect that changes the background (background prefetch effect) is executed in parallel with the special figure prefetch effect (normal prefetch effect) that changes the display mode of the hold display of the start memory with high expectation described above. You may There is a case where the player recognizes the starting memory corresponding to the background prefetch effect, but in this case, the expectation is higher than when the display mode of the hold display is simply changed, and It may be possible to further increase expectations.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special memory pre-reading effect is being executed, if the start memory having a higher expectation of a big hit occurs, the special character pre-reading effect that is executed in advance is executed. By switching (overwriting) to the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated starting memory, it is possible to give the player the original expectation of a big hit, and to maximize the effect of the pre-reading effect. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Finally, an example of an effect when the hold prefetching effect and the background prefetching effect are executed in parallel will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the hold prefetch effect and the background prefetch effect are executed in parallel, and the background prefetch effect being executed is switched to the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory. In the effect example shown in FIG. 95, the background prefetch effect related to the hold prefetch effect is executed.

FIG. 95(A) shows the state before the prefetch effect is executed, and shows the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is finished and the detached symbol is fixed. In the state shown in FIG. 95(A), three starting memories are reserved. FIG. 95(B) shows a state in which the starting memory that has been held is exhausted, the number of holdings changes from 3 to 2, and the variable display of the special symbol is started.

After that, during the change of the special symbol of FIG. 95(B), one game ball is won in the starting winning opening, and the execution lottery of the prefetching effect in the starting winning is won. FIG. 95C shows a state in which the special symbols continue to change and the hold prefetching effect is executed. At this time, the hold display of the hold 3 changes to the shape of "cumulonimbus" instead of the normal round shape. In addition, in the starting memory in which the hold prefetching effect is executed, the background prefetching effect is executed in parallel with the hold prefetching effect. In the background look-ahead production, the background changes from “cloudy” to “rain cloud” and finally to “thunder cloud (cumulonimbus)”. In this way, the hold prefetch effect changes the hold display to "cumulus cloud", and the background finally changes to "thundercloud" related to "cumulus cloud".

FIG. 95(D) shows a state in which the variable display of the special symbols is completed. Subsequently, FIG. 95(E) shows that the next pending start-up memory is exhausted and the special symbol is variably displayed. At this time, a cloud indicating "cloudy" is displayed in the background as a background prefetch effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 95(F), the variable display of the special symbols ends. At this time, the cloud displayed in the background may be left as it is or may be deleted once. It suffices if the player can recognize that the background prefetch effect has been executed.

FIG. 95(G) shows that the next pending start-up memory is further consumed and the special symbols are variably displayed. At this time, the hold display is in a state where the hold 1 is “cumulus cloud”, the hold 2 is “normal”, the hold 3 is “storm”, and the hold 4 is off. Further, as a background look-ahead effect, the background "cloud" changes to "rain cloud". In addition, as a result of winning the execution lottery of the pre-reading effect by the second starting memory (hold 3) during the variation display of the special symbols, the 2 winning balls win the starting winning opening, and the hold display indicates "Arashi". The shape changes. Further, the background prefetch effect is executed based on the starting memory corresponding to the hold 3. At this time, a scenario is selected in which the background changes from “lightly cloudy” to “thundercloud” and finally to “major storm”. Since there is a higher expectation that the starting display with the hold display of “storm” is a big hit than the starting storage with the hold display of “cumulus”, the background prefetch effect is switched (overwritten). FIG. 95(H) shows a state in which the variable display of the special symbols is finished, and the rain clouds are continuously displayed in the background.

FIG. 95(I) shows a state in which the starting memory in which the hold display is “cumulus clouds” is exhausted and the special symbol is variably displayed. Also, if the background lookahead effect is continued, cumulonimbus clouds (thunderclouds) should be displayed, but since the pending display has been switched to the background lookahead effect based on the starting memory of "Arashi", the background is "lightly cloudy". Is changed to. At this time, the hold display is in a state where the hold 1 is “normal”, the hold 2 is “storm”, and the hold 3 and the hold 4 are turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(J), a reach is generated based on the start memory in which the hold display is “cumulonimbus”, and the reach effect is executed. At this time, the background and the hold display remain unchanged.

When the reach variation of FIG. 95(J) is completed, the result of the variation display of the special symbol is lost as shown in FIG. 95(K). At this time, the background remains in a light cloudy state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 95(L), when the next fluctuation starts, the background changes to a thundercloud. Then, as shown in FIG. 95(M), the variation of the special symbol ends. At this time, the background and the hold display are the same as in the state shown in FIG.

Further, when the hold display consumes the starting memory of "Arashi", as shown in FIG. 95(N), the variable display of the special symbol is started. At this time, all the hold displays are turned off, and the background changes to "major storm (thunder + rainstorm)". Then, as shown in FIG. 95(O), the variable display of the special symbol is fixedly stopped, and a big hit occurs.

In the present embodiment, by associating the hold prefetching effect with the background prefetching effect and performing them in accordance with the display at the final stage of the scenario, how the background will finally change when the hold display changes It is possible to determine in advance (what kind of scenario will be selected (generated)). Further, the display mode corresponding to the hold display does not have to correspond to the final stage of the scenario, and may be the first stage or an intermediate stage. In the middle stage, there is a possibility that the display mode will change to a higher expectation in the final stage, and the player's expectation can be increased.

[22. Modification of special figure prefetch effect (continuous prefetch effect control)]
In the special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 66, FIG. 89, FIG. 92) described above, first, based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the start-up memory of the pre-reading object, first, the normal pre-reading effect of the hold display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. Is selected (steps S2002 and S2020), and the normal prefetch effect is executed (step S2003). The normal look-ahead effect here refers to changing the display mode of the hold display from a default mode (for example, white (see FIG. 67)) to another mode. Then, when the normal prefetching effect is executed, that is, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the continuous prefetching effect is configured to be executable. Here, the continuous prefetching effect indicates that the display mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses. The change mode of the continuous prefetch effect is to select the effect selection pattern set based on the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (step S2006, see FIG. 68), the remaining prefetch number (the number of display mode change timings), and the continuous prefetch effect. Is determined in the continuous prefetching effect setting process (FIG. 69) according to the random number range (upper limit value and lower limit value).

Then, in the continuous prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 69 ), a hold display of the start memory of the prefetch effect target is displayed at a timing at which the start memory of executing the variable display game precedes the start memory of the prefetch effect target. A process is executed in which the display mode after the change is changed and the display mode after the change has a lower degree of expectation than the display mode before the change, and the process is prevented from falling.

That is, the special figure pre-reading effect control for the start-up memory of the pre-reading target described above determines the display mode at the time of storage when the start-up memory occurs (at the time of winning), and then, when the continuous pre-reading effect is executed, it is pre-stored. When the starting memory is exhausted and the hold display position is switched, the lottery is performed each time the next display mode is determined. The special figure pre-reading effect control described above is performed in the start-up memory (holding start memory) in the hold state until the start-reading target start memory is consumed and the variable display game is started.

On the other hand, as a modified example, referring to FIGS. 96 to 107, not only the starting memory in the holding state (holding starting memory) but also the exhausted state, that is, the starting memory during execution of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory ( The special figure pre-reading effect control capable of executing the continuous pre-reading effect even for the digestion start memory) will be described. The special figure pre-reading effect control here is a control that executes a display mode in the holding state (holding display) and a display mode in the digested state (digested display) of the starting memory that is the pre-reading effect as a series of pre-reading effects. is there.

In the modified example, when the start memory is generated (at the time of winning), the display mode (final mode) at the end of variation of the start memory and the pending display change pattern based on the final mode are determined by the scenario table, and the variation of the start memory is started. An example of the special figure prefetching effect control for determining the digest display change pattern until the end of the change by the lottery will be described.

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the special drawing prefetching effect control of the modified example. FIG. 96(A) is a diagram for simply explaining the progress of a series of display modes of starting memory. FIG. 96(B) is a diagram illustrating an example of display changes in the hold start memory and the digest start memory.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), when the game ball wins the starting area (here, the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102) of the game area 1100, the variable display game is executed in advance. With a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit, the starting memory at the time of winning is in the digestion waiting state (holding state). As shown in FIG. 96(B), the start memory in the hold state is held and displayed on the first hold display section 1911a or the second hold display section 1911b of the start memory display section 1911 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It Then, the hold display mode of the pre-read start-up memory changes according to the change timing. The change timing here means that when the preceding starting memory is exhausted, when the number of game balls (overflow number) that exceeds a predetermined number exceeds the first predetermined number, in the variable display game being executed. It is possible that a reach effect occurs.

Here, the display mode (final mode) at the end of fluctuation corresponding to the startup memory is determined for the starting memory that is the prefetch target, and the change pattern during the pending display (the pending display scenario) is based on the final mode. ) Is determined. Then, when the variable display game corresponding to the pre-reading start memory is started, the start memory is displayed as the start memory in the exhausted state on the exhaustion display unit 1911c of the start memory display unit 1911 shown in FIG. 96(B). Digested and displayed. Then, the digest display mode of the starting memory that is the digest target changes according to the change timing. The change pattern of the digest display mode (digest display scenario) is determined by advance lottery from the variation start mode, the final mode, and the variation pattern. In addition, the change timing here is a point such as pseudo-run or reach occurrence set according to the change pattern of the change display game of the starting memory to be executed, and the number of game balls generated exceeding a predetermined number ( It is conceivable that the number of overflows) exceeds the first predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 96 (B1), the start display display (holding 1 display) with the oldest storage order displayed on the first holding display portion 1911a starts the variable display game as shown in (B2). At the same time, the digest is displayed on the digest display unit 1911c. At this time, the display mode in the hold 1 display is changed to the fluctuation start mode determined at the time of the start winning when the display is exhausted. Then, when the variable display game progresses and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1910 becomes the reach state, the display mode of the digest display in the digest display unit 1911c changes. The digest display mode can be changed at a change timing of the effect provided in advance when there is room to change from the change start mode to the final mode during the change display game. In the transition from (B2) to (B3) in FIG. 96, the digest display mode changes at the change timing due to the occurrence of the reach effect. In the modified example, the variation start mode and the final mode of the digest display are determined at the time of winning, but the mode during the digest display (during variation display) is determined at the start of the variation. In addition, in the starting memory in which there is no information on the final mode which should have been determined at the time of winning at the start of variation, the final mode is determined at the start of variation.

Further, when the starting storage display (holding 1 display) having the oldest storage order displayed in the first holding display portion 1911a in FIG. 96(B1) is exhausted, the holding 4 is displayed due to the change timing due to the holding exhaustion. The holding start memory that has been displayed is displayed in the hold 3 display in FIG. 96(B2). The display mode of the hold start storage changes at this hold exhaustion timing. The timing of changing the mode of the hold start storage is not limited to the time when the hold is exhausted (change of the hold display position). If there is room to change from the current mode to the fluctuation start time mode, it can be changed by the arrival of another change timing. In the transition from (B2) to (B3) in FIG. 96, the mode of the hold 1 display changes at the change timing when the overflow number reaches the first predetermined number. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to change the hold display when the change timing comes (when the change condition is satisfied). In the case where an effect such that the hold display of the first hold display unit 1911a is temporarily hidden (display that is difficult for the player to visually recognize) is performed along with the reach effect, it does not change even when the change timing comes. When the display returns to the original state, the hold display may be changed according to the condition that the change timing is satisfied. Even if the player changes the mode of the hold display in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, when the player returns to the normal visually recognized state, it is difficult for the player to notice that the mode has changed. By changing the mode in the normal visual recognition state, it is possible to prevent the sense of expectation in the mode change from being impaired and to increase the player's sense of expectation. For this reason, as for the mode change of the hold display, the mode change timing may be different from the change condition satisfaction timing if the change along the change pattern (holding display scenario) determined at the time of winning is followed.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the hold display and the digestion display stepwise by the continuous prefetching effect of the starting memory that is the prefetching target, the player's expectation can be continuously increased further. Such processing will be described below.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure prefetching effect control processing of the modified example. The same processes as those in the above-described special drawing prefetching effect control process (FIG. 66) are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the process of setting the prefetching effect of steps S2031 to S2036, which will be described later, and then The prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004), and the special map prefetching effect control process is ended. The special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 of FIG. 42) when the special figure prefetching effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 of FIG. 48 or FIG. 79). ). On the other hand, if the special figure prereading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the special figure prereading effect is not executed, so the special figure prereading effect control process is ended.

Peripheral control MPU4150a, from the special diagram pre-reading effect command (symbol type pre-reading command, fluctuation pattern pre-reading command, fluctuation type pre-reading command and fluctuation distribution table information pre-reading command) which is received from main control baseplate 4100 first, in the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern Based on this, the final mode of the start memory display is determined using the final mode determination table (FIG. 98) (step S2031). The final mode here is a display mode of the start memory display (digest display) when the variable display corresponding to the start memory to be read ahead ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 98, the final mode determination table used in the process of step S2031 described above will be described. FIG. 98 is an example of the final mode determination table of the modified example.

As shown in FIG. 98, the final mode of the start memory display that is the prefetch target is the variation display result (here, “out” or “big hit”) and variation pattern (here, “normal”, “normal reach”, “ SP reach”). For example, in the case of a starting memory in which a "normal" pattern in which no reach occurs and "is out", the final aspect becomes "white" with a probability of 90%. Here, the display mode of the start memory display becomes “white” when the prefetch effect is not executed, and changes to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” according to the degree of expectation. In the case of starting memory in which the result of the variable display game is “big hit”, there is a probability of 80% that the target is prefetched.

Returning to FIG. 97. The peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the scenario selection table (FIG. 99) and the hold scenario pattern table (FIG. 100) based on the final mode determined in the process of step S2031 to change the start storage display mode and the hold display scenario. The pattern is determined (step S2032). The variation start time mode here is a display mode of the start memory display (digest display) when the variable display corresponding to the start memory to be read ahead (the same as the start memory for which the final mode is determined) starts. Details of the scenario selection table and the hold scenario pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the display mode of the start memory display from the hold scenario (FIG. 100) determined in the process of step S2032 described above (step S2033), and changes the start memory display to the acquired display mode. The start memory display setting process for setting the above is executed (step S2034). In the startup memory display setting process, similar to the normal prefetching effect setting process (step S2003), the display color of the hold display to be prefetched is changed, and a sound effect is output at the timing of change. Make settings to turn on the lamp or move the accessory. Details of the hold scenario pattern will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the continuous prefetch effect execution count set in the hold scenario pattern (FIG. 100) to the remaining effect number (step S2035), and determines whether or not the remaining effect number at this time is 0 (step S2035). Step S2036). If the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2036 is "No"), the pending start memory-continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2037). After that, the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2038), and the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S2036 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S2038), and ends the special figure prefetching effect control processing. To do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, a scenario of the start memory display at the start of variation of the prefetch target and the start memory display in the hold state, which are determined in the process of step S2032, will be described. FIG. 99 is an example of a scenario selection table of a modified example. FIG. 100 is an example of the pending scenario pattern table of the modified example.

As shown in FIG. 99, the variation start time mode and the hold display scenario are randomly selected according to the final mode of the start memory display that is the prefetch target. At this time, the mode having a higher degree of expectation than the final mode is not set for the fluctuation start mode. For example, when the final mode is determined to be "green" in the process of step S2031, the fluctuation start mode is 20% with a probability of "white", 45% with a probability of "blue", and 35%. It becomes "green" with a probability. Then, the pending display scenarios 1 to 4 are selected according to the variation start mode. In addition, when the final mode is determined to be "rainbow", "rainbow" is not set as the fluctuation start mode because the digest display change is always generated during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 100, pending display scenarios 1 to 4 respectively correspond to the variation start mode “white” “blue” “green” “red”. Then, one pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns in which the display mode change in which the holding exhaustion is used as the change timing is defined according to the number of starting memories. The selection probabilities at this time are evenly distributed. Specifically, when the pending display scenario 2 is determined from the scenario selection table (FIG. 99) in the process of step S2032 described above and the number of startup memories at this time is "3", the startup memory of the prefetch target is first. Alternatively, patterns D to F are set as the display modes when displayed in the hold 1 to 3 start memories of the second hold display units 1911a and 1911b. The patterns D to F are selected at a rate of 1/3, respectively. When the pattern F is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires "white" information as the display mode of the hold 3 start memory in the process of step S2033 described above, and displays the hold 3 start memory in the process of step S2034. The mode is "white" and the mode does not change.

In addition, the number of times of continuous prefetch effect execution is set for each pattern. The number of times of continuous prefetching effect execution here indicates the number of changes in the display mode that occurs when the start-up memory of the prefetching target is displayed in the holding 1 to 4 start-up memories. In the case of the pattern F of the hold display scenario 2 described above, the display mode changes from “white” to “blue” when the start memory to be read ahead is moved from the hold 2 start memory to the hold 1 start memory. Therefore, the number of times of continuous prefetch effect execution is “1”. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets "1" to the number of remaining effects in the process of step S2035 described above. As a result, the change timing is provided once when the start-up memory of the prefetch target is displayed in a suspended manner. Then, this change timing is usually reached by the exhaustion of the preceding pending starting memory.

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process of the modified example. The processes common to the above-mentioned effect setting process (FIG. 51) are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The effect setting process is a process for setting effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronization effect.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the effect contents of the start memory display unit 1911 of the liquid crystal display device 1900, similarly to the continuous prefetch effect setting process (the process of step S1524, FIG. 69) in the effect setting process (FIG. 51) described above. To execute. Here, instead of the continuous prefetching effect setting process described above, a hold start storage continuous prefetching effect setting process (step S1560) for setting effect contents for the hold display of the first or second hold display units 1911a and 1911b, and a digest display unit. A digestion start storage start time setting process (step S1570) for setting the effect contents for the digestion display of 1911c is executed.

First, FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the pending start storage continuous prefetching effect setting process of the modified example. In the pending start-up memory continuous prefetching effect setting process, the continuous prefetching effect (mode change effect) during the hold display of the starting memory that is the prefetching target is controlled.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the hold start storage-continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2111). The hold start storage-continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2037 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 97) described above. Then, if the flag is not set (the result of step S2111 is "No"), this processing ends.

When the flag is set (the result of step S2111 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the change condition is satisfied (step S2112). The fulfillment of the change condition means the timing at which the display mode changes in the hold display scenario pattern determined in the process of step S2032 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 97) or the fulfillment of another preset condition (overflow). Number reaches the first predetermined number). Then, when the changing condition is not satisfied (the result of step S2112 is “No”), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the change condition is satisfied (the result of step S2112 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the changed start memory display mode from the hold display scenario pattern (step S2113) and acquires the acquired display mode. First, a start memory display setting process for setting the start memory display is executed (step S2114). After that, the remaining effect number is updated by subtracting 1 (step S2115), and it is determined whether the updated remaining effect number is 0 (step S2116). If the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S2116 is "Yes"), the pending start memory-continuous prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2117), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the remaining effect number is not 0 (the result of step S2116 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the hold start memory-continuous prefetch effect execution flag because the mode change timing still occurs during the hold display. This process ends with the status set.

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the digestion start storage start time setting process of the modified example. In the digestion start memory start time setting process, the mode at the time of starting the digestion display of the start memory that has become the digestion target (variation start) and the subsequent continuous prefetching effect (mode change effect) are set.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first sets the variation start time mode in the startup memory display (digest display) of the variation start target (step S2211). The variation start mode is determined in the process of step S2032 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 97) described above. Note that the digest display is not changed from the basic color “white” when there is no information on the variation start mode.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not there is information on the final mode in the start memory of the fluctuation start target (step S2212). If there is no information on the final aspect (the result of step S2212 is “No”), the final aspect is determined based on the variation display result and the variation pattern (step S2213). At this time, the final mode determination table (FIG. 98) is used similarly to the process of step S2031 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 97) described above.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the final mode of the start memory display of the fluctuation start target matches the current mode at the start of fluctuation set in the process of step S2211 (step S2214). If the final aspect and the variation start-time aspect match (result of step S2214 is “Yes”), the aspect change during the digest display does not occur, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the final aspect and the variation start-time aspect do not match (the result of step S2214 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the number of changes based on the variation pattern of the start memory of the variation start target as the lottery number. It is set (step S2215). The number of changes is the total of the change timings provided at the change points (eg, reach occurrence, pseudo continuous occurrence) in advance according to the change pattern, and does not include the change start timing and the final timing. .. Then, the digest display scenario setting process is executed (step S2116). In the digest display scenario setting process, lottery for the number of changes is performed based on the digest display lottery table (FIG. 105), and the variation mode scenario is set in a predetermined storage area. Details of the digest display scenario setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the digest start memory continuous prefetch effect execution flag indicating that the mode change effect is executed during the digest display is set (step S2217), and this processing is ended.

Here, the scenario generation method in the above-described digest display scenario setting process (step S2216) will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the digest display scenario setting process of the modified example. FIG. 105 is an example of the digest display lottery table of (A) Modification, and is an example of a time chart explaining the timing of (B) digest display lottery.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the number of times of lottery is 0 (step S2221). If the number of times of lottery is not 0 (the result of step S2221 is “No”), the change mode of the change point immediately before the determined change mode is displayed in the digest display lottery table (FIG. 105). The lottery is performed based on (step S2222).

Here, the lottery in the process of step S2222 described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the digest display lottery table of FIG. 105(A), the vertical axis defines the determined change mode, and the horizontal axis defines the mode before the change mode (pre-change mode). Then, with respect to the determined change mode, the lottery probabilities are assigned to the same mode and the mode having low expectation as a pre-change mode so that a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the determined change mode is not drawn. ing. For example, when the change mode is “blue”, “white” is selected as the pre-change mode with a probability of 55%, and “blue” is selected with a probability of 45%.

As shown in FIG. 105(B), change points 1 to 5 are set in advance according to the effect of the variation pattern selected at the start of variation. In the digest display scenario of the modification, the mode at the change point immediately before the final mode is determined by lottery. By repeating this lottery for the number of change points in sequence from the final mode, the change scenario of the modes from the variation start mode to the final mode, that is, the digest display scenario is set.

Subsequently, FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of a modified decorative symbol variation process. The same symbols are assigned to the processes common to the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52) described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern variation process of the modified example, the effect control (steps S1601 to S1660) from the start to the end of the special figure synchronization effect is performed as in the case of FIG. The process of setting the effect contents of the start memory display unit 1911 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed.

Peripheral control MPU4150a, before executing the process of step S1601, hold start memory continuous prefetching effect setting process (step S1670) that changes the effect for the hold display of the first or second hold display unit 1911a, b, and the digest display The digestion start memory continuous prefetching effect setting process (step S1680) for changing the effect for the digestion display of the unit 1911c is executed.

First, the hold start storage continuous prefetching effect setting process (step S1670) is the same as the process of step S1560 of the effect setting process (FIG. 101) executed at the start of variation. The details are as described above with reference to FIG. The changing condition here is a condition other than the timing at which the preceding starting memory is exhausted, for example, the timing when the overflow number reaches the first predetermined number or the timing when the reach occurs in the variable display game being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the digestion start memory continuous prefetch effect setting process (step S1680) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing an example of the digestion start storage continuous prefetch effect setting process of the modified example. Here, the continuous prefetching effect (mode change effect) during the exhaustion display (variation execution) of the starting memory of the exhaustion target is controlled.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the digestion start memory-continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2311). The digestion start memory-continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2217 of the above-described digestion start memory start time setting process (FIG. 103). Then, if the flag is not set (the result of step S2311 is “No”), this processing ends.

When the flag is set (the result of step S2311 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the change condition is satisfied (step S2312). The establishment of the change condition indicates the timing at which a change point set in advance in accordance with the variation pattern is reached or the number of overflows reaches a first predetermined number. Then, when the change condition is not satisfied (the result of step S2312 is “No”), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the change condition is satisfied (the result of step S2312 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the start memory display mode at the next change point from the digest display scenario (step S2313) and the acquired display. A start memory display setting process is executed to set the mode for changing the start memory display (step S2314). After that, the remaining number of changes is updated by subtracting 1 (step S2315), and it is determined whether the number of remaining changes after updating is 0 (step S2316). When the remaining number of changes is 0 (the result of step S2316 is "Yes"), the digestion start memory-continuous prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2317), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the remaining number of changes is not 0 (the result of step S2316 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the digest start memory-continuous prefetch effect execution flag because the mode change timing during the digest display is still present. This process ends with the status set.

As described above, in the modified example, the advance notice of the hold start memory display (hold display) is taken over to give the notice effect of the changing start digest memory display (end display). At this time, since the final mode of the digest display and the variation start mode are determined (prefetched) when the start memory occurs (at the time of winning), the digest display can be said to be one of the continuous prefetch effects like the hold display. Therefore, the continuous prefetching effect for one starting memory can be continuously executed not only when the starting memory is held but also until the end of the variation, so that the player's expectation for the stepwise change of the starting memory display is continued. It is possible to raise it. The continuous look-ahead effect in the hold display can suppress a decrease in the gaming enjoyment of the variable display game that is executed until the target starting memory is exhausted, and the continuous look-ahead effect in the digestion display is the variable display during execution. It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

In the modified example, when the starting memory is generated (at the time of winning), the display mode (final mode) at the end of the variation of the starting memory and the mode transition of the pending display based on the final mode are changed by the pending scenario pattern table (FIG. 100). However, the change of the mode of the digestion display at the start of the change of the start memory until the end of the change is determined by the preliminary lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. When executing a series of continuous prefetching effects with the hold display and the digest display, the mode transition of the hold display is determined from the prefetch determination information at the time of winning, and the mode transition of the digest display from the current mode and the variation start time information at the start of fluctuation. You may decide. The same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the change timing of the display form of the start memory display is not limited to the preceding start memory exhaustion timing and the preset change point of the effect, and also includes the timing when the overflow number becomes the first predetermined number or more. With this, for example, if the number of overflows is counted in a game state where the game ball is continuously launched as in the case of opening the ordinary electric power, and the display mode can be changed when the number of overflows becomes the first predetermined number or more, The player can generate the change timing of the display mode by his own intention without waiting for the predetermined timing. When there is room for the starting memory display to change (rise) from the current mode, the mode changes when triggered. Therefore, even if the overflow ball is meaningless to the player in terms of the game, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the occurrence of the overflow ball by giving a meaning as a means for measuring the expectation in advance in the look-ahead notice production. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to enhance the fun of playing games. The first predetermined number may be a preset value, or may be set by a lottery at the time of winning or starting fluctuation of the start memory of the prefetch target. Further, the counting period of the overflow number may be a preset time, a period set in a lottery similar to the first predetermined number of set lottery, or a predetermined game state (for example, a normal electric open state). The period may be targeted.

In the modified example, the condition for acquiring the change timing is that the number of overflows reaches the first predetermined number, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery may be performed each time the number of overflows occurs, and the mode of the hold start memory display may be changed according to the result of the lottery. By associating the mode of the occurrence notification effect (effect) when the overflow ball occurs with the mode change content that can be obtained by lottery (no change, 1 step up, 2 step up, change to the final mode of the hold start memory display, etc.) , The mode cannot be changed if there is no room for the effect to be derived even if the effect that originally derives the mode change is executed. Therefore, the player can judge the expectation level of the reserved starting memory (whether it is no longer satisfied) by the effect. it can. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the modified example, the advance notice of the hold start memory display (hold display) is taken over and the notice production of the changing start-up memory display (end display) is performed. At this time, the mode transition (holding display scenario) ) Is determined by the pending scenario pattern table (FIG. 100) at the time of winning. However, it is not limited to this. The mode change of the hold display is performed each time the display mode at the next hold display position is determined when the pre-stored starting memory is exhausted as in the continuous prefetching effect setting process (FIG. 69) of the above-described embodiment. May be determined by As a result, since it is not necessary to provide the pending scenario pattern table on the peripheral control board 4140, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data and enhance the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the scenario by lottery each time.

Further, in a modified example, the variation start mode and the final mode of the digest start memory display (digest display) are determined at the start memory winning. Then, the mode transition (change pattern) during the digestion display (variation display) is determined by performing the pre-lottery for the number of change timings set in advance at the start of the change. By pre-determining the final aspect of the continuous prefetching effect for one starting memory at the time of winning, it becomes easy to associate a series of continuous prefetching effects with the degree of expectation, and provide the player with an appropriately secured degree of expectation. can do. It is the last mode of the start memory display (that is, the final mode here) that the player finally determines the degree of expectation for the effect in the start memory display. Therefore, by predetermining the final mode at the time of winning, it is possible to give the degree of freedom to the mode transition to the final mode without causing a deviation from the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the modified example, when the starting memory of the fluctuation start target does not have the final mode information of the exhaustion display, the final mode is determined at the start of the fluctuation. As a result, for example, it is possible to restore and execute the digestion display portion of the series of continuous prefetching effects even for the starting memory in which the information was not maintained due to the occurrence of power interruption, etc. even though it was the prefetching target. become.

Here, since the expectation is ensured by determining the final mode (mode at the end of fluctuation) of a series of continuous look-ahead effects at the time of starting memory winning, as described above, the timing for determining the mode transition of starting memory display (at the time of winning) , At the start of fluctuation, when conditions are satisfied) and as a determination method (preliminary lottery, scenario table, and occasional lottery), any combination is possible.

[23. Specific expected production appearance control]
As described above, in the special figure prefetching effect control of the modified example, by determining the variation ending time mode (final mode) of the starting memory when the starting memory occurs (at the time of winning), a series of continuous prefetching effects of the starting memory. The degree of expectation is guaranteed. Here, similarly, by determining the number of appearances of a high-expectation item (specific expected effect) at the time of winning, it is possible to avoid the player's sense of expectation excessively, and the vagueness that the player cannot measure the expectation degree. Control for ensuring the degree of expectation of a corresponding variable display game so as not to be an effect and improving the reliability of a specific expected effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the specific expected production appearance control of the modified example, and shows the relationship between the number of production appearances with high expectation and the player's expectation.

As shown in FIG. 108, the greater the number of high-expectancy items (specific expected effects) that indicate a high expectation of a big hit in the variable display game, the more likely the player is to expect. However, in the conventional game machine (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-208006), the number of appearances of high-expectancy items and the expectation of a big hit have not been associated. When a variation pattern with a high expectation is selected, a table with a high probability of selecting a high-expectancy item is used each time an item is selected, so that the number of times a high-expectancy item appears inevitably increases. Therefore, even if the result of the variable display game is “out of bounds”, in the case of a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation that a reach is generated, despite the fact that all high-expectation items have appeared at the item appearance points Finally, there is a concern that an event that ends in fluctuation due to the deviation result may occur. At this time, the player has an excessive sense of expectation, which is the sum of the expectation of the player due to the occurrence of reach and the expectation that increases each time a high-expectancy item appears. In this way, the provision of the production in which no beneficial result for the player is derived even after the player's expectation is scattered, rather reduces the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since the number of appearances of high-expectation items cannot guarantee the expectation of a big hit, the reliability of a specific expected performance is not stable, and the player cannot measure the expectation, which makes the player entertaining for the game. There was a concern to lower it.

Therefore, in the modification, the appearance management control (specific expected presentation appearance control) is performed by presetting the number of appearances of the high-expectancy item. As the control process, after reaching the preset number of appearances, it is replaced with another item, the table used at each expected performance execution point when setting the number of appearances is set, and the expected performance execution point is set. Instead of individual control for each, the overall control of the execution points is performed. In this way, the high-expectancy item does not appear more than necessary in the series of expected effects. For example, as shown in the figure, if the number of appearances is one in the variable display game in which a reach result is lost even if a reach occurs, another item that is not highly expected appears at another execution point. Therefore, the player will not have an excessive expectation.

In the following, with reference to FIG. 109, the number of appearances of a specific expected effect is determined in advance, and the use table at the execution point of the expected effect is set based on the number of appearances, whereby the reliability of the specific expected effect is determined. The specific expected effect appearance control for suppressing the decrease of the will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice production table setting process.

Here, the specific expected effect appearance control (preliminary effect table setting process) may be executed by the main control MPU 4100a or the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When executed by the main control MPU 4100a, it can be executed in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 77). If the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 a command indicating the use table (preliminary effect table) set in the notice effect table setting process, such as the above-mentioned variable allocation table information prefetch command (FIG. 74 etc.). Good. The command transmission timing is at the time of starting winning (pre-reading) and at the start of fluctuation. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes, it can be executed in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (Fig. 97) at the time of start winning, and can be executed in the effect setting process (Fig. 101) at the start of variation. Hereinafter, the notice effect table setting process will be described as the execution process of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

As shown in FIG. 109, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not it is a start-up memory that is a lottery target (step S2401). Here, the lottery refers to a high-expectation appearance lottery in which the number of appearances of a specific expected effect (an effect with a high expectation, a high-expectancy item) described below is preset. As the lottery target, for example, it is possible to set a starting memory that is a variation pattern in which there is an opportunity to execute a notice effect that allows selection of a specific expected effect, or a starting memory that has a high expectation but is a disappointing result. .. Further, here, all the starting memories may be targets (all the results of step S2401 are “Yes”).

If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the starting memory for the lottery target (the result of step S2401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the high-expectancy appearance lottery (step S2402). In the high-anticipation appearance lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of appearances of a particular expected presentation in the notice production. When there are a plurality of types of specific expected effects, a combined lottery that also includes combinations thereof is performed. Specifically, since the pattern number is associated with the number of appearances of a specific expected effect (combination of the number of appearances of a plurality of types), the pattern number is selected by lottery. The range of pattern numbers selectable by lottery and the selection probability of each pattern number are set according to the starting memory information. It is set such that the more the result derived from the starting memory is advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of appearance of the specific expected effect.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a group determination lottery according to the number of appearances (pattern number) determined by the high expected appearance lottery (step S2403). Here, a plurality of groups are provided for one type of specific expected effect, and group pattern numbers are associated with each other according to the number of combinations of appearances. In the group determination lottery, one number is selected from the group pattern numbers corresponding to the determined number of appearances. In the case of a plurality of types of specific expected effects, a group determination lottery is performed for each.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the notice effect table lottery in the group selected by the group determination lottery (step S2404). Here, the group is provided with a plurality of patterns of notice effect tables according to the scene (effect mode, game state, look-ahead notice, etc.) in which a specific expected effect is executed. The notice production table lottery is executed for the set number of appearances.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets so that the notice effect table selected by the notice effect table lottery is used (step S2405), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not the starting memory of the lottery target (the result of step S2401 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets to use the notice effect table according to the set variation pattern (step S2406). , This process ends.

As described above, in the modified example, by controlling the number of appearances of effects (specific expected effects) with high expectations among multiple types of effects (expected effects) indicating the expectations, the player can be provided with more sense of expectation. Without giving it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game for the player. Further, the reliability of the specific expected performance can be improved, so that the player can appropriately grasp the expected degree. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the number of appearances can be determined when the start memory occurs (at the time of winning), it can be applied to the look-ahead effect of the start memory, and the player may have an excessive expectation in the look-ahead effect. Can be prevented.

Further, by determining the number of appearances in advance, it is easy to associate the number of appearances of a specific expected effect with the expectation of a big hit, that is, it is easy to secure the expectation by the number of appearances. As a result, the reliability of the specific expected performance can be improved, and the player can appropriately grasp the expectation level, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the ambiguity of the performance and excessive agitation.

[24. Other hole structure (flock structure)]
By the way, the game ball received in the two general winning openings 2201 of the other hole structure provided in the game board of the above-mentioned (FIG. 8) and the conventional literature (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-34756) passes through the common flow path. The game panel 1150 is guided from the front side to the rear side. Therefore, it is difficult for the game balls to be received in the two general winning openings 2201 at the same time, which causes a reduction in the receiving efficiency of the winning openings.

Therefore, in a modified example, referring to FIG. 110 to FIG. 114, another hole structure (flock structure) capable of simultaneously receiving a plurality of winning openings (two general winning openings 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200) is shown. .. FIG. 110(A) is an enlarged view of the side winning opening member 2200 portion of the modified game board, and FIG. 110(B) is an enlarged side winning opening member 2200 portion of the above-described embodiment (FIG. 8). It is a figure. In the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations corresponding to the embodiments. The front, rear, left and right in the description refer to the direction in which the player who is playing the game looks at the gaming machine.

The side winning opening member 2200 of FIG. 110(A) has two general winning openings 2201 opened so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, as compared with FIG. 110(B). Although the points are common, they are different in that a flow path structure for guiding the game ball received in each general winning opening 2201 from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the game panel 1150 is provided for each winning opening.

FIG. 111: (A) front view of the side winning opening member 2200 of a modification, (B) rear view, (C) rear perspective view focusing on the general winning opening 2201a side, (D) focusing on the general winning opening 2201b side. FIG. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted into the opening 1158 (see FIG. 9) of the game panel 1150 from the front side and then attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 via the attachment portion 2230.

As shown in FIGS. 111(A) and (B), the two general winning openings 2201 provided in the side winning opening member 2200 are a general winning opening 2201a provided upstream (left side in front view) and a downstream general winning opening 2201a (right side in front view). ) And a general winning opening 2201b. In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 includes receiving passages 2210 and 2220 for guiding the game balls received in the general winning openings 2201a and 2201b to the discharge passages 3610 and 3620 (see FIG. 112) of the back unit 3000, respectively. The side winning opening member 2200 is provided with a boundary wall 2205 that partitions the receiving flow path 2210 and the receiving flow path 2220. The boundary wall 2205 is arranged so as to be located on the side of the receiving flow path 2210 opposite to the general winning opening 2201a and on the side of the receiving flow path 2220 opposite to the general winning opening 2201b. That is, the receiving flow channel 2210 and the receiving flow channel 2220 are configured to face each other on both sides of the boundary wall 2205. In addition, a guide member 2211 and a guide member 2221 are arranged in the receiving passage 2210 and the receiving passage 2220 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the opening surface of the general winning opening 2201a and the opening surface of the general winning opening 2201b, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 111C, the receiving flow path 2210 is provided with a guide member 2211 for guiding the game ball toward the discharge flow path 3610, that is, the rear surface direction. The guide member 2211 includes an inclined surface inclined from the front side of the general winning opening 2201a toward the rear side of the boundary wall 2205 and the front surface of the receiving flow path 2210 (the front surface of the cover forming the general winning opening 2201a of the side winning opening member 2200). ) And the boundary wall 2205 are triangular ribs. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201a flows down the inclined surface of the guide member 2211 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1150. The receiving passage 2210 is inserted into the opening 1158 (see FIG. 9) of the game panel 1150 at a portion rearward of the mounting portion 2230.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), the receiving channel 2220 is provided with a guiding member 2221 for guiding the game ball toward the discharging channel 3620, that is, the rear surface direction. The guide member 2221 includes an inclined surface inclined from the front side of the general winning opening 2201b toward the rear side of the boundary wall 2205 and the front surface of the receiving flow path 2220 (the front surface of the cover forming the general winning opening 2201b of the side winning opening member 2200). ) And the boundary wall 2205 are triangular ribs. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201b flows down the inclined surface of the guide member 2221 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1150. The receiving passage 2220 is inserted into the opening 1158 (see FIG. 9) of the game panel 1150 at a portion rearward of the mounting portion 2230.

Subsequently, FIG. 112 is a front view (A), a perspective view (B) and an exploded perspective view (C) of a discharge channel 3600 of a modified example. The discharge flow path 3600 is one of the constituent members of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and the general winning openings provided in the back unit 3000 with the game balls accepted by the general winning openings 2201a, 2201b and 2204. It is a flow path that guides the game ball to be detected by the switch 3020.

As shown in FIGS. 112A to 112C, the discharge flow path 3600 includes a discharge flow path cover 3601 having discharge flow path inlets 3611, 3621, and 3631 protruding forward, and a discharge flow path inlet 3611. It is composed of a discharge flow path body 3602 in which the game balls passing through 3621 and 3631 roll. The discharge flow path 3600 forms discharge flow paths 3610, 3620, and 3630 by covering the front surface of the discharge flow path body 3602 with a discharge flow path cover 3601. The discharge flow path inlets 3611, 3621, and 3631 correspond to the general winning openings 2201a, 2201b, and 2204, respectively. Further, the discharge flow paths 3610, 3620 and 3630 respectively have discharge flow path inlets 3611, 3621 and 3631 and a common discharge flow path outlet 3603. A general winning opening switch 3020 is provided at the discharge flow path outlet 3603. The discharge flow paths 3610, 3620, and 3630 are provided so that the time required to reach the discharge flow path outlet 3603 is different.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), the discharge flow path cover 3601 is provided with a discharge flow path inlet corresponding to the upper starting port 2101 in addition to the discharge flow path inlets 3611, 3621, and 3631. The game ball received in the upper starting port 2010 together with the flow path main body 3602 constitutes a discharge flow path capable of flowing down, but is configured separately from the discharge flow path 3600, and a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the configuration of the discharge channel 3600 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. 113 is a perspective view (A), a front view (B), and a rear view (C) of the discharge flow path cover 3601. FIG. 114 is a front view (A) and a perspective view (B) of the discharge flow path 3600 portion of the discharge flow path body 3602.

As shown in FIGS. 113(A) to (C), the discharge flow path cover 3601 is a game received in the general winning opening 2201a as an entrance for receiving the game ball flowing down the discharge flow path 3600 from the front of the game panel 1150. A discharge passage inlet 3611 through which a ball can pass, a discharge passage inlet 3621 through which a game ball received in the general winning opening 2201b can pass, and a discharge passage through which a game ball received in a general winning opening 2104 can pass And an inlet port 3631. The discharge passage inlets 3611 and 3621 are the rear end portions of the receiving passages 2210 and 2220 of the side winning opening member 2200, the front end portions of which are inserted into the opening portion 1158 of the game panel 1150 when the game board 4 is configured. The game balls that abut and flow down the receiving flow paths 2210 and 2220 are arranged so as to be able to receive the game balls. Similarly, the discharge flow path inlet port 3631 is arranged so that the game balls received in the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 can flow down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113(C), on the back surface of the discharge flow path cover 3601, a position corresponding to the flow path through which the game ball flows down, that is, the front surface of the discharge flow path 3600 formed with the discharge flow path body 3602. The conductive member 3601 a is provided in the range where The conductive member 3601a releases the static electricity generated by the rolling of the game ball flowing down the discharge flow path 3600. The conductive member 3601a may be one in which a conductive paint is coated (applied) on the back surface of the discharge flow path cover 3601, or a thin film conductive member may be attached (bonded) to the discharge flow path 3600. Any material may be used as long as it has an antistatic function of static electricity without disturbing the flow-down.

As shown in FIGS. 114A and 114B, the discharge flow path body 3602 is provided with rolling spaces for the discharge flow paths 3610, 3620, and 3630. In these rolling spaces, a guide member 3612 that guides the game spheres that have flowed in from the discharge flow path inlets 3611, 3621, and 3631 that are provided so as to project forward to the discharge flow path cover 3601 so as to flow downward, 3622 (3622a, 3622b) and 3632 are provided. The guide members 3612, 3622a, and 3632 are conversion members that change the rolling direction so that the game ball rolling from the front to the rear rolls from the upper side to the lower side. The guide member 3622b is a conversion member that converts the rolling direction so that the game ball rolling from the front to the rear rolls from the left to the right.

The guide member 3612 is located at the upper end portion of the discharge flow path 3610 and behind the discharge flow path inlet 3611, and is a front view of the discharge flow path 3600 as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be visible through 3611. The guide member 3612 is a triangular rib formed by the upper end surface of the discharge flow path 3610, the rear surface of the discharge flow path 3610, and an inclined surface that is inclined from the front end of the upper end surface toward the lower side of the rear surface. Therefore, the game ball that is received in the general winning opening 2201a and guided from the front to the rear of the game panel 1150 by the receiving flow path 2210 is guided downward by the discharge flow path 3610 and passes through the discharge flow path outlet 3603 on the downstream side. At this time, the winning is detected by the general winning opening 3020.

The guide member 3622 is located at the upper end portion of the discharge flow path 3620 and behind the discharge flow path inlet 3621, and as shown in FIG. 112(A) described above, the discharge flow path inlet 3600 is a front view of the discharge flow path 3600. It is provided so as to be visible through 3621. The guide member 3622 includes a first guide member 3622a provided so as to project in the vertical direction from the flow path surface in a front view of the discharge flow path 3600, and a second guide member 3622b provided so as to project in the horizontal direction. .. The first guide member 3622a is a triangular rib formed by the upper end surface of the discharge flow path 3620, the rear surface of the discharge flow path 3620, and an inclined surface that is inclined from the front end of the upper end surface toward the lower side of the rear surface. is there. The second guide member 3622b is a triangular rib formed by the left end surface of the discharge flow path 3620, the rear surface of the discharge flow path 3620, and an inclined surface inclined from the front end of the left end surface toward the right side of the rear surface. Is. Therefore, the game ball that is received in the general winning opening 2201b and guided from the front to the rear of the game panel 1150 by the receiving flow path 2220 is guided to the lower right by the discharge flow path 3620 and passes through the downstream discharge flow path outlet 3603. When the game is played, the winning is detected by the general winning opening 3020.

The guide member 3632 is located at the upper end portion of the discharge flow path 3630 and behind the discharge flow path inlet 3631, and is a front view of the discharge flow path 3600 as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be visible through the port 3631. The guide member 3632 is a triangular rib formed by an upper end surface of the discharge flow path 3630, a rear surface of the discharge flow path 3630, and an inclined surface inclined from the front end of the upper end surface toward the lower side of the rear surface. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2104 and guided from the front to the rear of the game panel 1150 by the receiving flow path, it is guided downward by the discharge flow path 3630 and passes through the discharge flow path outlet 3603 on the downstream side. The prize is detected by the general winning opening 3020.

From the above, the game balls received in the two general winning openings 2201a and 2201b provided in the side winning opening member 2200 of the modified example flow down different flow paths and are guided and discharged from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the game panel 1150. To be done. As a result, since it becomes possible to simultaneously receive the game balls into the two general winning openings 2201a and 2201b, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event such that one of the game balls is played by the other gaming ball outside the winning opening due to the simultaneous reception. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the winning efficiency of the winning opening.

Further, the game balls received in the general winning openings 2201a and 2201b opened in different directions along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 are rolled in the left and right directions by the guide members 2211 and 2221 of the receiving flow paths 2210 and 2220. It is converted from (the surface of the game area 1100) to the front-rear direction (from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the game panel 1150), and the rolling direction is changed from the front-rear direction to the vertical direction (by 3622b) by the guide members 3612 and 3622a of the discharge flow paths 3610 and 3620. It is converted from the front-back direction to the left-right direction). By providing such a guide member, it becomes possible to arrange different flow paths for each winning opening in the limited space of the game board 4. That is, it is possible to provide another hole structure (flock structure) capable of preventing a reduction in the receiving efficiency of the winning opening.

Further, in the discharge flow path 3600, a conductive member 3601 a is provided on the discharge flow path cover 3601 on the front surface. As a result, the static electricity generated by the rolling of the game ball can be removed, so that the game ball can smoothly flow down to the discharge flow path outlet 3603. Therefore, the winning of the game ball by the general winning opening switch 3020 can be detected within an appropriate time.

It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be implemented in various modes as long as they are within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko gaming machine, such as slot machines or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball).

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 400 Operation unit (operation section)
470 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device 650 Hitting ball launching device 740 Award ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error release part)
860b Error LED display 1100 Gaming area 1900 Gaming board side liquid crystal display device 2200 Side winning opening member 2201a, 2201b General winning opening 2205 Boundary wall 2210, 2220 Accepting channel 2211, 2221 Inducing member 3600, 3610, 3620, 3630 Discharging channel 3601 discharge flow path cover 3601a conductive member 3602 discharge flow path body 3603 discharge flow path outlets 3611, 3621, 3631 discharge flow path inlets 3612, 3622 (3622a, 3622b), 3632 guide member 4100 main control board (main control means, game control) Board, game control unit, special game state generation means, game state transition means, variable winning device control means, effect information transmission means, game machine related information transmission means, lottery game execution means, specific game execution means, pre-determination means, game (Information transmitting means, starting information storage means, pattern selection table changing means, privilege granting means, winning assistance means, game pattern selecting means, overflow number counting means, execution number determining means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Dispensing control board (dispensing control board, dispensing control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (production control means, production control unit, production execution means, production determination means, production storage means, production generation information selection means, production content selection means, production selection information change means, production execution timing determination means, specific production Execution means, predetermined effect execution means, predetermined effect control means, game information receiving means, pre-processing execution means, pre-production execution means, pre-notification means, pre-notification mode specifiable setting means, pre-notification mode unspecified setting means, pre-notification Effect switching means, start memory display means, expectation notification means, notification mode setting means, start information acquisition time setting means, lottery game execution start time setting means, expected effect execution means, execution count determination means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

Starting information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of starting information that can be acquired upon winning a game medium in a winning area within the game area,
Starting memory display means capable of displaying the starting information as a starting memory display on a display device,
A lottery game execution means capable of executing a lottery game based on the starting information;
Pre-determination means capable of determining whether or not the lottery game derives a specific result based on the starting information when the starting information is acquired,
Expectation degree informing means capable of informing stepwise by a plurality of informing modes whether or not the lottery game derives a specific result based on the starting information,
Digestion memory display means capable of displaying the starting information for executing the lottery game as a digestion memory display in a region different from the start memory display of the display device,
Display mode setting means capable of displaying the display mode of the digestion memory display at the start of execution of the lottery game and at the time of deriving the result, respectively, in the notification mode,
The display mode of the start memory display is started in a mode based on the start information, and the display mode can be gradually changed to the notification mode at a predetermined start memory display change timing ,
When the display mode when the result derivation of said lottery game to be displayed as the display mode of the previous SL digestion storage display is displayed in the notification manner, the notification manner is displayed as a display mode when the result derivation of said lottery game The start information is acquired upon the winning of the game medium without determining when the starting information is acquired upon the winning of the game medium as a gradual change transition of the notification mode that can be changed in stages until only the time or the notification manner, which is displayed when the result deriving the lottery game as a display mode of the digestive storage displayed by the final mode determination means when starting execution of the lottery game is determined,
The display mode of the digestion memory display is when the display mode setting means starts the display in the display mode of the starting memory display immediately before the execution of the lottery game and the display mode setting means starts the execution of the lottery game. There is a case where the display is started in a mode different from the display mode of the immediately preceding starting memory display, and in any case, the final stage is stepwise every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of deriving the result of the lottery game. It is possible to change until the notification mode determined by the mode determination means is displayed,
A series of display modes by the start memory display and the digestion memory display after the start memory display is displayed until the result of the lottery game is derived are the result of the lottery game after the start memory display is displayed. Is changed in stages until is derived, at the time of starting execution of the lottery game and at the time of deriving the result, it is displayed in a display mode predetermined by the display mode setting means ,
When the display mode of the digestive memory display is not the notification mode determined by the final mode determining means, the predetermined condition is satisfied during the reach which is the process of deriving the result of the lottery game, and the display mode of the digestive memory display Is changeable to the notification mode determined by the final mode determination means .